Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual: Part No: E62184-07

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 332

Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual

Part No: E62184-07


January 2021
Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual
Part No: E62184-07
Copyright © 2016, 2021, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
License Restrictions Warranty/Consequential Damages Disclaimer
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except
as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform,
publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.
Warranty Disclaimer
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs (including any operating system, integrated software, any programs embedded, installed or activated on delivered hardware,
and modifications of such programs) and Oracle computer documentation or other Oracle data delivered to or accessed by U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer
software" or "commercial computer software documentation" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the
use, reproduction, duplication, release, display, disclosure, modification, preparation of derivative works, and/or adaptation of i) Oracle programs (including any operating system,
integrated software, any programs embedded, installed or activated on delivered hardware, and modifications of such programs), ii) Oracle computer documentation and/or iii) other
Oracle data, is subject to the rights and limitations specified in the license contained in the applicable contract. The terms governing the U.S. Government's use of Oracle cloud
services are defined by the applicable contract for such services. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Hazardous Applications Notice
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous
applications, including applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all
appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Trademark Notice
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Inside are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Epyc, and the AMD logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Third-Party Content, Products, and Services Disclaimer
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are
not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement
between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Revenue Recognition Notice
If this document is in private pre-General Availability status:
The information contained in this document is for informational sharing purposes only and should be considered in your capacity as a customer advisory board member or pursuant
to your pre-General Availability trial agreement only. It is not a commitment to deliver any material, code, or functionality, and should not be relied upon in making purchasing
decisions. The development, release, timing, and pricing of any features or functionality described in this document may change and remains at the sole discretion of Oracle.
This document in any form, software or printed matter, contains proprietary information that is the exclusive property of Oracle. Your access to and use of this confidential material
is subject to the terms and conditions of your Oracle Master Agreement, Oracle License and Services Agreement, Oracle PartnerNetwork Agreement, Oracle distribution agreement,
or other license agreement which has been executed by you and Oracle and with which you agree to comply. This document and information contained herein may not be disclosed,
copied, reproduced, or distributed to anyone outside Oracle without prior written consent of Oracle. This document is not part of your license agreement nor can it be incorporated
into any contractual agreement with Oracle or its subsidiaries or affiliates.
Documentation Accessibility

For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support

Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
Référence: E62184-07
Copyright © 2016, 2021, Oracle et/ou ses affiliés.
Restrictions de licence/Avis d'exclusion de responsabilité en cas de dommage indirect et/ou consécutif
Ce logiciel et la documentation qui l'accompagne sont protégés par les lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ils sont concédés sous licence et soumis à des restrictions d'utilisation et
de divulgation. Sauf stipulation expresse de votre contrat de licence ou de la loi, vous ne pouvez pas copier, reproduire, traduire, diffuser, modifier, accorder de licence, transmettre,
distribuer, exposer, exécuter, publier ou afficher le logiciel, même partiellement, sous quelque forme et par quelque procédé que ce soit. Par ailleurs, il est interdit de procéder à toute
ingénierie inverse du logiciel, de le désassembler ou de le décompiler, excepté à des fins d'interopérabilité avec des logiciels tiers ou tel que prescrit par la loi.
Exonération de garantie
Les informations fournies dans ce document sont susceptibles de modification sans préavis. Par ailleurs, Oracle Corporation ne garantit pas qu'elles soient exemptes d'erreurs et vous
invite, le cas échéant, à lui en faire part par écrit.
Avis sur la limitation des droits
Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l'accompagne, est livré sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à quiconque qui aurait souscrit la licence de ce logiciel pour le
compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s'applique :
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs (including any operating system, integrated software, any programs embedded, installed or activated on delivered hardware,
and modifications of such programs) and Oracle computer documentation or other Oracle data delivered to or accessed by U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer
software" or "commercial computer software documentation" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the
use, reproduction, duplication, release, display, disclosure, modification, preparation of derivative works, and/or adaptation of i) Oracle programs (including any operating system,
integrated software, any programs embedded, installed or activated on delivered hardware, and modifications of such programs), ii) Oracle computer documentation and/or iii) other
Oracle data, is subject to the rights and limitations specified in the license contained in the applicable contract. The terms governing the U.S. Government's use of Oracle cloud
services are defined by the applicable contract for such services. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Avis sur les applications dangereuses
Ce logiciel ou matériel a été développé pour un usage général dans le cadre d'applications de gestion des informations. Ce logiciel ou matériel n'est pas conçu ni n'est destiné à
être utilisé dans des applications à risque, notamment dans des applications pouvant causer un risque de dommages corporels. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel ou matériel dans le cadre
d'applications dangereuses, il est de votre responsabilité de prendre toutes les mesures de secours, de sauvegarde, de redondance et autres mesures nécessaires à son utilisation dans
des conditions optimales de sécurité. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité quant aux dommages causés par l'utilisation de ce logiciel ou matériel pour des
applications dangereuses.
Marques
Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés. Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à d'autres propriétaires
qu'Oracle.
Intel et Intel Inside sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques ou des marques
déposées de SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Epyc, et le logo AMD sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX est une marque déposée de The
Open Group.
Avis d'exclusion de responsabilité concernant les services, produits et contenu tiers
Ce logiciel ou matériel et la documentation qui l'accompagne peuvent fournir des informations ou des liens donnant accès à des contenus, des produits et des services émanant de
tiers. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité ou garantie expresse quant aux contenus, produits ou services émanant de tiers, sauf mention contraire stipulée
dans un contrat entre vous et Oracle. En aucun cas, Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés ne sauraient être tenus pour responsables des pertes subies, des coûts occasionnés ou des
dommages causés par l'accès à des contenus, produits ou services tiers, ou à leur utilisation, sauf mention contraire stipulée dans un contrat entre vous et Oracle.
Avis sur la reconnaissance du revenu
Si ce document est fourni dans la Version préliminaire de Disponibilité Générale ("Pre-GA") à caractère privé :
Les informations contenues dans ce document sont fournies à titre informatif uniquement et doivent être prises en compte en votre qualité de membre du customer advisory board
ou conformément à votre contrat d'essai de Version préliminaire de Disponibilité Générale ("Pre-GA") uniquement. Ce document ne constitue en aucun cas un engagement à fournir
des composants, du code ou des fonctionnalités et ne doit pas être retenu comme base d'une quelconque décision d'achat. Le développement, la publication, les dates et les tarifs des
caractéristiques ou fonctionnalités décrites sont susceptibles d'être modifiés et relèvent de la seule discrétion d'Oracle.
Ce document contient des informations qui sont la propriété exclusive d'Oracle, qu'il s'agisse de la version électronique ou imprimée. Votre accès à ce contenu confidentiel et son
utilisation sont soumis aux termes de vos contrats, Contrat-Cadre Oracle (OMA), Contrat de Licence et de Services Oracle (OLSA), Contrat Réseau Partenaires Oracle (OPN),
contrat de distribution Oracle ou de tout autre contrat de licence en vigueur que vous avez signé et que vous vous engagez à respecter. Ce document et son contenu ne peuvent en
aucun cas être communiqués, copiés, reproduits ou distribués à une personne extérieure à Oracle sans le consentement écrit d'Oracle. Ce document ne fait pas partie de votre contrat
de licence. Par ailleurs, il ne peut être intégré à aucun accord contractuel avec Oracle ou ses filiales ou ses affiliés.
Accessibilité de la documentation

Pour plus d'informations sur l'engagement d'Oracle pour l'accessibilité de la documentation, visitez le site Web Oracle Accessibility Program, à l'adresse : http://www.oracle.com/
pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Accès aux services de support Oracle

Les clients Oracle qui ont souscrit un contrat de support ont accès au support électronique via My Oracle Support. Pour plus d'informations, visitez le site http://www.oracle.com/
pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info ou le site http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs si vous êtes malentendant.
Contents

Using This Documentation ................................................................................ 13


Product Documentation Library .......................................................................  13
Feedback ...................................................................................................... 13

About the Oracle Server X6-2L .........................................................................  15


Product Description .......................................................................................  15
About Controls and Connectors .......................................................................  16
Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems ........................................  16
Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems .....................................  18
Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems ..............................  19
Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections .......................................... 20
About System Components .............................................................................  21
Illustrated Parts Breakdown ..................................................................... 22
Customer-Replaceable Units ....................................................................  24
Field-Replaceable Units ..........................................................................  25

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics .....................................................................  27


Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults ...........................................  27
Troubleshooting Server Hardware Faults ...................................................  28
Troubleshooting and Diagnostic Information ..............................................  31
Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators .... 32
Troubleshooting System Cooling Issues ..................................................... 37
Troubleshooting Power Issues .................................................................. 39
Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the Oracle ILOM Fault
Management Shell .................................................................................  42
Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools .............................................................  42
Diagnostic Tools ...................................................................................  43
Diagnostic Tool Documentation ...............................................................  44

5
Contents

Attaching Devices to the Server .......................................................................  44


▼ Attach Devices to the Server ..............................................................  45
Rear Panel Connector Locations ..............................................................  45
Configuring Serial Port Sharing ...............................................................  47
Server Operating System Names for the NVMe Storage Drives ......................  48
Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming ............................................  49
Rear Panel Pinhole Switches ...................................................................  50
Getting Help .................................................................................................  52
Contacting Support ................................................................................  52
Related Information ...............................................................................  52
Locating the Chassis Serial Number .........................................................  53

Preparing for Service ........................................................................................  55


Safety Precautions .........................................................................................  55
Safety Symbols .............................................................................................  56
Electrostatic Discharge Safety .......................................................................... 56
FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update ......................................... 57
Related Information ...............................................................................  58
Required Tools .............................................................................................. 58
Preparing the Server for Component Replacement ...............................................  59
Powering Down the Server .....................................................................  59
▼ Disconnect Cables From the Server .....................................................  65
▼ Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position ......................................  66
▼ Remove the Server From the Rack ......................................................  67
▼ Take Antistatic Measures ...................................................................  68
▼ Remove the Server Top Cover ............................................................  69
▼ Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server ..................................  70
▼ Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server ......................................  72

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off ...................................  75


Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU) ...............................................  75
Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions .........................................................  76
Storage Drive Failure and RAID ..............................................................  76
Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive .............................. 77
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris ..........  83
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux ...........  86
Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive ...........................................  90

6 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Contents

Servicing Fan Modules (CRU) ......................................................................... 93


▼ Remove a Fan Module ......................................................................  94
▼ Install a Fan Module ......................................................................... 97
Servicing Power Supplies (CRU) .....................................................................  99
▼ Remove a Power Supply ..................................................................  100
▼ Install a Power Supply ....................................................................  102

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off .............................................  105


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU) .........................................................................  105
DIMM and Processor Physical Layout ..................................................... 106
DIMM Population Scenarios ..................................................................  107
DIMM Population Rules .......................................................................  108
Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance .................................  108
Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance ........................................................................................ 109
Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance ........................................................................................ 111
DIMM Operating Speeds ......................................................................  112
DIMM Rank Classification Labels ..........................................................  112
Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of
Faulty DIMMs ....................................................................................  113
Using the Server Fault Remind Button ....................................................  113
▼ Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM ................................................. 114
▼ Install a DIMM ..............................................................................  118
Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU) .........................................................................  120
PCIe Slot Locations .............................................................................  121
▼ Remove a PCIe Card ......................................................................  122
▼ Install a PCIe Card .........................................................................  125
Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU) ................................................  128
▼ Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive ................................................. 128
▼ Install an Internal USB Flash Drive ...................................................  129
Servicing the Battery (CRU) ..........................................................................  131
▼ Remove the Battery ........................................................................  131
▼ Install the Battery ...........................................................................  132

Servicing FRUs ................................................................................................  135


Servicing Processors (FRU) ...........................................................................  136

7
Contents

▼ Remove a Processor ........................................................................  137


▼ Install a Processor ..........................................................................  144
Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU) ............................  150
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems ................ 151
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems ..................  154
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems .............  156
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems ................  160
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems ......  162
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems .........  165
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives ....  167
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives ......  169
Servicing SAS Cables (FRU) .........................................................................  171
▼ Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables ...................................................  171
▼ Install SAS Storage Drive Cables ......................................................  174
Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU) ...................................................................... 177
Related Information .............................................................................  178
▼ Remove NVMe Cables ....................................................................  178
▼ Install NVMe Cables ....................................................................... 181
Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU) ..............  183
▼ Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card .............  184
▼ Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card ...............  187
Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU) ....................................................................  190
▼ Remove the DVD Drive ..................................................................  191
▼ Install the DVD Drive .....................................................................  193
Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU) ..................................... 196
▼ Remove the Left LED Indicator Module .............................................  196
▼ Install the Left LED Indicator Module ................................................  200
▼ Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module ....................................  204
▼ Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module ....................................... 208
Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU) ....................................................  212
▼ Remove the Motherboard Assembly ................................................... 212
▼ Install the Motherboard Assembly .....................................................  222

Returning the Server to Operation ..................................................................  229


Server Filler Panel Requirements .................................................................... 229
▼ Remove and Install Filler Panels ...............................................................  230
▼ Install the Server Top Cover .....................................................................  230

8 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Contents

▼ Install the Fan Assembly Door .................................................................. 232


▼ Install the Disk Cage Cover .....................................................................  233
▼ Remove Antistatic Measures ..................................................................... 234
▼ Reinstall the Server in the Rack ................................................................  234
▼ Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position ............................................  235
▼ Reconnect Power and Data Cables ............................................................. 237
▼ Power On the Server ...............................................................................  237

Identifying the Server Ports ............................................................................  239


Gigabit Ethernet Ports ..................................................................................  239
Network Management Port ............................................................................  240
Serial Management Port ................................................................................  241
Video Connector ..........................................................................................  243
USB Ports ..................................................................................................  244

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters ....................................................  245


Managing the BIOS Configuration .................................................................. 245
Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility ...................................................................  246
BIOS Setup Utility Menus ....................................................................  246
BIOS Key Mappings ............................................................................  247
▼ Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus .....................................................  247
▼ Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus ..................................................  249
Using UEFI ................................................................................................  250
Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode ............................................  250
Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes ............................  251
UEFI Boot Mode Advantages ................................................................  252
Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards ..................................................  252
Using BIOS for Resource Allocation ............................................................... 253
Legacy Option ROM Allocation .............................................................  253
Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks ................................................................. 254
▼ Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings ................................................. 254
▼ Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode ...................................  256
▼ Select the Boot Device ....................................................................  257
▼ Configure TPM Support ..................................................................  259
▼ Configure SP Network Settings .........................................................  262
▼ Configure Option ROM Settings .......................................................  265
▼ Configure I/O Resource Allocation ....................................................  269

9
Contents

▼ Exit BIOS Setup Utility ...................................................................  272

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options ....................................................................  275


BIOS Main Menu Selections .........................................................................  275
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections ...................................................................  279
BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration Options .............................  280
BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration Options ........  281
BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option ................................ 282
BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options ...............................................  282
BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options ...................  283
BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options ...................................  284
BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options .........................................  285
BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options ......................  286
BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options ..................................  289
BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options ...................................  291
BIOS IO Menu Selections .............................................................................  292
BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options .......................................  293
BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options ................................................  293
BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options ...........................................  294
BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options .................................................  294
BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options .....................................................  295
BIOS Boot Menu Selections ..........................................................................  295
BIOS Exit Menu Selections ...........................................................................  297

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages ..............................  299


Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle ILOM ............................  299
Monitoring System Components .....................................................................  300
System Chassis Components ..................................................................  301
Cooling Unit Components .....................................................................  303
Disk Backplane Components .................................................................  304
Memory Device Components .................................................................  305
Power Unit Components .......................................................................  306
Processor Components ..........................................................................  307
System Board Components ....................................................................  308
System Firmware Components ...............................................................  309
Hard Disk Drive Components ................................................................  310
Identifying SNMP Trap Messages ..................................................................  311

10 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Contents

Environmental Events ...................................................................................  312


Hard Disk Drive Events ................................................................................  314
Power Events ..............................................................................................  314
Fan Events .................................................................................................  319
Memory Events ...........................................................................................  320
Entity Presence Events .................................................................................  325
Physical Security Events ...............................................................................  326

Index ................................................................................................................  327

11
12 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
Using This Documentation

■ Overview – This service manual explains how to remove and replace parts in Oracle Server
X6-2L, and how to maintain and troubleshoot the system.
■ Audience – This guide is intended for trained technicians and authorized service personnel
who have been instructed on the hazards within the equipment and qualified to remove and
replace hardware.
■ Required knowledge – Advanced experience troubleshooting and replacing hardware.

Product Documentation Library


Documentation and resources for this product and related products are available at https://
www.oracle.com/goto/x6-2l/docs.

Feedback
Provide feedback about this documentation at https://www.oracle.com/goto/docfeedback.

Using This Documentation 13


14 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
About the Oracle Server X6-2L

These sections describe the controls, connectors, LEDs, system components, and replaceable
components of the server.

Note - Always update the server with the latest firmware, drivers, and other hardware-related
software by downloading the latest software release package when you first receive the server,
and for every new software release. For information about the software release packages and
how to download the software, refer to “Getting Firmware and Software Updates” in Oracle
Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

Description Links
Review the product description. “Product Description” on page 15
Review the controls and connectors on the server. “About Controls and Connectors” on page 16
Review system components. “About System Components” on page 21

Product Description
The Oracle Server X6-2L is an enterprise-class, two rack unit (2U) server. It supports the
following components:
■ Up to two Intel processors. Processors with the following capabilities are supported:
■ 22-core, 2.2 GHz, 145W processors
■ 14-core, 2.6 GHz, 135W processors
■ 10-core, 2.2 GHz, 85W processors
■ 6-core, 3.4 GHz, 135W processors
■ Up to 12 DIMMs per processor for a maximum of 24 DDR4 DIMMs and a maximum of 1.5
TB of memory are supported in dual-processor systems. A maximum of 12 DDR4 DIMMs
and a maximum of 768 GB of memory are supported in single-processor systems. RDIMMs
(16 GB and 32 GB) and LRDIMMs (64 GB) are supported.
■ Six PCIe Gen3 slots in the dual-processor systems. PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional
in single-processor systems.

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 15


About Controls and Connectors

■ Storage drive configurations can comprise both hard disk drives (HDDs) or solid state disk
drives (SSDs). Configurations include:
■ Up to twelve 3.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs
■ Up to twenty-four 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for
up to four PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
■ Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for a
SATA DVD and up to four PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
■ (Optional) Up to two rear-mounted 2.5-inch SAS storage drives in the twelve 3.5-inch
storage drive and twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drive configurations
■ Two hot-pluggable, redundant 1000W power supplies.
■ An on-board Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) service processor (SP)
based on the Emulex Pilot 3 chip.

About Controls and Connectors

The following sections describe the controls, indicators, connectors, and drives located on the
front and rear panels.

■ “Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 18


■ “Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 19
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20

Related Information

■ “About System Components” on page 21


■ “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 22
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32

Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems

Note - Systems with eight drives can contain an optional DVD drive. Systems with twelve
drives and twenty-four drives do not contain a DVD drive.

16 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


About Controls and Connectors

Call Out Description


1 Locator LED/Locator button: white
2 Service Required LED: amber
3 Power/OK LED: green
4 Power button
5 SP OK LED: green
6 Product Serial Number (PSN) and Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) label
7 Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
8 Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
9 Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 0)
10 Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 1)
11 Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 2)
12 Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 3)
13 Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
14 Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
15 Optional SATA DVD drive
16 Top Fan Fault LED: amber
17 Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber
18 System Over Temperature Warning LED: amber
19 USB 2.0 connectors (2)

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 17


About Controls and Connectors

Related Information
■ “Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 18
■ “Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 19
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32

Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems

Call Out Description


1 Locator LED/Locator button: white
2 Service Required LED: amber
3 Power/OK LED: green
4 Power button
5 SP OK LED: green
6 Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
7 Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
8 Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD)
9 Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD)
10 Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD)
11 Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD)

18 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


About Controls and Connectors

Call Out Description


12 Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
13 Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
14 Storage drive 8 (HDD/SSD)
15 Storage drive 9 (HDD/SSD)
16 Storage drive 10 (HDD/SSD)
17 Storage drive 11 (HDD/SSD)
18 Top Fan Fault LED: amber; Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber; System Over
Temperature Warning LED: amber
19 USB 2.0 connectors (2)

Related Information
■ “Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 16
■ “Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 19
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32

Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive


Systems

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 19


About Controls and Connectors

Call Out Description


1 Locator LED/Locator button: white
2 Service Action Required LED: amber
3 Power/OK LED: green
4 Power button
5 SP OK LED: green
6 Storage drives 0 through 11 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 3 and 4: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
7 Storage drives 12 through 23 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 19 and 20: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
8 Top Fan Fault LED: amber; Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber; System Over
Temperature Warning LED: amber
9 USB 2.0 connectors (2)

Related Information

■ “Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 16


■ “Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 18
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32

Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections

Note - Systems that are configured with twelve and twenty-four front panel storage drives also
contain two rear-mounted storage drives. Systems that are configured with eight front panel
storage drives do not contain rear-mounted storage drives.

20 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


About System Components

Call Out Description


1 Rear storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
2 Rear storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
3 Power supply unit 0 (PS0)
4 Power supply unit 1 (PS1)
5 PCIe slot 1 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
6 PCIe slot 2 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
7 PCIe slot 3 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems. This slot is the default slot for the
optional Oracle PCIe Switch Controller Card.)
8 Network (NET) 100/1000/10000 ports (NET3–NET0) (NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in
single-processor systems.)
9 System status LEDs: Locator/Button: white; Service Required: amber; Power/OK: green
10 Serial management (SER MGT)/RJ-45 serial port
11 Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) service processor (SP) network management
10/100/1000BASE-T port (NET MGT)
12 USB 2.0 ports (2)
13 DB-15 video connector
14 PCIe slot 4
15 PCIe slot 5
16 PCIe slot 6 (This slot is the default slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA.)

Note - For more information on rear panel components and connections, refer to “Rear Panel
Connector Locations” on page 45. See also “Rear Panel Pinhole Switches” on page 50.

Related Information
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237
■ “Identifying the Server Ports” on page 239

About System Components


These sections describe the components of the server:
■ “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 22

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 21


About System Components

■ “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24


■ “Field-Replaceable Units” on page 25

Related Information

■ “Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off” on page 75


■ “Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off” on page 105
■ “Servicing FRUs” on page 135

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

The following figure identifies the major components of the server.

22 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


About System Components

FIGURE 1 System Components

Figure Description
Legend
1a Twelve 3.5-inch storage drives
1b Twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives
1c Eight 2.5-inch storage drives
2a Front disk backplane for twelve 3.5-inch drives

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 23


About System Components

Figure Description
Legend
2b Front disk backplane for twenty-four 2.5-inch drives
2c Front disk backplane for eight 2.5-inch drives
3 Left LED indicator module
4 System chassis
5 Motherboard assembly
6 System battery
7 Fan modules
8 Processors and heatsinks (Single-processor systems contain only a single processor in socket P0; socket P1
contains a cover to protect processor socket pins.)
9 DIMMs (Only twelve DIMMs are supported in single-processor systems and the DIMMs must be installed
in P0 DIMM sockets.)
10 Air baffle
11 Top cover
12 Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA and super capacitor
13 PCIe cards (PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
14 I/O and internal USB card
15 Internal USB drive
16 Rear-mounted storage drives
17 Rear storage drive backplane
18 Power supplies
19 Right LED indicator module
20 DVD drive (optional)

Customer-Replaceable Units

The following table lists the customer-replaceable units (CRUs) in the server and directs you to
the replacement instructions.

CRU Description Replacement Instructions


Battery Lithium coin-cell battery that powers the CMOS BIOS “Servicing the Battery (CRU)” on page 131
and real-time clock.
DIMMs Add or replace memory modules in the system. “Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 105
Storage drives Storage drive configurations can comprise both hard “Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives
disk drives (HDDs) or solid state disk drives (SSDs). (CRU)” on page 75
Configurations include:

24 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


About System Components

CRU Description Replacement Instructions


■ Up to twelve 3.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs
■ Up to twenty-four 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS
HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for up to four
PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
■ Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or
SSDs, with optional support for up to four PCIe-
based NVMe SSDs
Internal USB flash Supports two internal USB flash drives. “Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives
drives (CRU)” on page 128
Fan modules Four fan modules for cooling the server components. “Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 93
PCIe cards Optional add-on cards that can expand the functionality “Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)” on page 120
of the server.
Power supply unit Two fully redundant AC-powered power supplies. “Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 99
(PSU)

Related Information

■ “Field-Replaceable Units” on page 25


■ “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 22
■ “Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off” on page 75
■ “Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off” on page 105

Field-Replaceable Units

The following table lists the field-replaceable units (FRUs) in the server and directs you to the
replacement instructions.

FRU Description Replacement Instructions


Processor and The processor that carries out the instructions of the “Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 136
heatsink system.
Disk backplanes Provide power and communications connectors for “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes
storage drives. (FRU)” on page 150
SAS cables Provide signals between the front disk backplane and “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171
the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA,
and from the front disk backplane to the rear disk
backplane.
NVMe cables Provide signals between the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch “Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 177
card and the disk backplane.

About the Oracle Server X6-2L 25


About System Components

FRU Description Replacement Instructions


Oracle Storage 12 Located in PCIe slot 6, the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS “Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
Gb/s SAS PCIe PCIe RAID HBA manages SAS storage drives. HBA Card (FRU)” on page 183
RAID HBA
DVD drive Optional DVD drive on configurations with eight 2.5- “Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)” on page 190
inch drives.
Front LED/USB Contain the push-button circuitry and LEDs that are “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules
indicator modules displayed on the bezel of the chassis. (FRU)” on page 196
Motherboard Provides connectors for the DIMMs, processors, PCIe “Servicing the Motherboard Assembly
assembly risers, and other components. (FRU)” on page 212

Related Information
■ “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24
■ “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 22
■ “Servicing FRUs” on page 135

26 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

This section includes information about troubleshooting hardware component faults for the
Oracle Server X6-2L. It contains the following topics.

Description Link
Maintenance-related information and procedures that you “Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware
can use to troubleshoot and repair server hardware issues. Faults” on page 27
Information about software and firmware diagnostic “Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools” on page 42
tools that you can use to isolate problems, monitor the
server, and exercise the server subsystems.
Information about attaching devices to the server to “Attaching Devices to the Server” on page 44
perform troubleshooting.
Information about contacting Oracle support. “Getting Help” on page 52

Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults

This section contains maintenance-related information and procedures that you can use to
troubleshoot and repair server hardware issues. The following topics are covered.

Description Section Links


Troubleshooting overview information and procedure. “Troubleshooting Server Hardware
Faults” on page 28
Resources for troubleshooting and diagnostic “Troubleshooting and Diagnostic
information. Information” on page 31
Discerning the server state using the front and rear panel “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel
indicators. Status Indicators ” on page 32
Causes, actions, and preventative measures for problems “Troubleshooting System Cooling
related to the cooling subsystem. Issues” on page 37
Causes, actions, and preventative measures for problems “Troubleshooting Power Issues” on page 39
related to the power subsystem.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 27


Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults

Troubleshooting Server Hardware Faults


When a server hardware fault event occurs the system lights the Service Required LED and
captures the event in the system event log (SEL). If you have set up notifications through
Oracle ILOM, you also receive an alert through the notification method you chose. When you
become aware of a hardware fault, you should address it immediately.

To investigate a hardware fault, see the following:

■ “Basic Troubleshooting Process” on page 28


■ “Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 29

Basic Troubleshooting Process


Use the following process to address a hardware fault (for the step-by-step procedure, see
“Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 29).

1. Identify the server subsystem containing the fault.


You can use Oracle ILOM to identify the failed component.
2. Review the Oracle Server X6-2L Product Notes.
The product notes contain up-to-date information about the server, including hardware-
related issues.
3. Prepare the server for service using Oracle ILOM.
If you have determined that the hardware fault requires service (physical access to the
server), use Oracle ILOM to take the server offline, activate the Locate LED, and power off
the server.
4. Prepare the service work space.
Before servicing the server, prepare the work space, ensuring ESD protection for the server
and components.
See “Preparing for Service” on page 55.
5. Service components.
To service the components, see the removal, installation, and replacement procedures in this
document.

Note - A component designated as a field-replaceable unit (FRU) must be replaced by


Oracle Service personnel. Contact Oracle Service.

6. Clear the fault in Oracle ILOM.

28 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Depending on the component, you might need to clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. Generally,
components that have a FRU ID clear the fault automatically.

Related Information

■ See “Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 29

Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web


Interface

Note - The screens shown in this procedure might differ from those for your server.

This procedure uses the basic troubleshooting steps described in “Basic Troubleshooting
Process” on page 28.

Use this procedure to troubleshoot hardware faults with the Oracle ILOM web interface and, if
necessary, prepare the server for service.

Note - This procedure provides one basic approach to troubleshooting hardware faults. It
uses a combination of the Oracle ILOM web interface and command-line interface (CLI).
However, the procedure can be performed using only the Oracle ILOM CLI interface. For
more information about the Oracle ILOM web interface and CLI, refer to the Oracle ILOM
documentation.

Before beginning this procedure, obtain the latest version of the Oracle Server X6-2L Product
Notes.

1. Log in to the server SP Oracle ILOM web interface.


Open a browser and direct it using the IP address of the server SP. Enter a user name (with
administrator privileges) and password at the log-in screen. The Summary Information screen
appears.
The Status section of the Summary Information screen provides information about the server
subsystems, including:

■ Processors
■ Memory
■ Power
■ Cooling

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 29


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

■ Storage
■ Networking

2. In the Status section of the Oracle ILOM Summary Information screen, identify
the server subsystem that requires service.

In the above example, the Status screen shows that the Processor subsystem requires service.
This indicates that a hardware component within the subsystem is in a fault state.

3. To identify the component, click on Processors in the Status section.


The Oracle ILOM Processors screen appears.

30 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

The above example shows the Processors subsystem screen and indicates that CPU 0 has a
fault.

4. To get more information, click one of the Open Problems links.


The Open Problems screen provides detailed information, such as the time the event occurred,
the component and subsystem name, and a description of the issue. It also includes a link to an
Oracle KnowledgeBase article.

Tip - The System Log provides a chronological list of all the system events and faults that
have occurred since the log was last reset and includes additional information, such as severity
levels and error counts. The System Log also includes information on device not reported in the
Subsystem Summary screen. To access the System Log, in the left panel, click System Log .

In this example, the hardware fault with CPU 0 requires local/physical access to the server.

5. Before going to the server, review the Oracle Server X6-2L Product Notes for
information related to the issue or the component.
The product notes contain up-to-date information about the server, including hardware-related
issues.

6. To prepare the server for service, see “Preparing for Service” on page 55.
After servicing the component, you might need to clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. For more
information, refer the service procedure for the component.

7. Service the component.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostic Information

The following table lists diagnostic and troubleshooting-related procedures and references that
can assist you with resolving server issues.

Description Link
Diagnostic information for the x86 servers, including Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics, Applications, and
procedures for performing runtime and firmware-based Utilities Guide for Servers with Oracle ILOM 3.1 and
tests, using Oracle ILOM, and running U-Boot and UEFI Oracle ILOM 5.0.x
Diagnostics tests to exercise the system and isolate subtle
and intermittent hardware-related problems.
Administrative information for the Oracle Sun Server Oracle X6 Series Servers Administration Guide
X-6 series servers, including information about how to

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 31


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Description Link
use the Oracle ILOM system event log (SEL) to identify
a problem's possible source.
Information about troubleshooting front and rear panel “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel
status indicators. Status Indicators ” on page 32
Information about how to manage server hardware faults “Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the Oracle
using the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell. ILOM Fault Management Shell” on page 42

Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear


Panel Status Indicators
These sections describe the status indicators (LEDs) located on the front and rear of the server,
including those found on components and ports. This section includes the following topics:
■ “Server Boot Process and Normal Operating State Indicators” on page 32
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Server Fan Status Indicators” on page 34
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 35
■ “Network Management Port Status Indicators” on page 36
■ “Ethernet Ports Status Indicators” on page 36
■ “Motherboard Status Indicators” on page 36

Related Information
■ “Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 16
■ “Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 18
■ “Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 19
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20

Server Boot Process and Normal Operating State Indicators


A normal server boot process involves two indicators, the service processor SP OK LED
indicator and the Power/OK LED indicator.

When AC power is connected to the server, the server boots into standby power mode:
1. The SP OK LED blinks slowly (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off) while the SP is starting,
and the main Power/OK LED remains off until the SP is ready.

32 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

2. After a few minutes, the main Power/OK LED slowly flashes the standby blink pattern (0.1
seconds on, 2.9 seconds off), indicating that the SP (and Oracle ILOM) is ready for use. In
standby power mode, the server is not initialized or fully powered on at this point.

When powering on the server (either by the Power button or Oracle ILOM), the server boots to
full power mode:
1. The Power/OK LED blinks slowly (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off), and the SP OK LED
remains lit (no blinking).
2. When the server has successfully booted, the Power/OK LED remains lit. When the Power/
OK LED and the SP OK LED indicators remain lit, the server is in full power mode.

Note - The green Power/OK LED indicator and the green SP OK indicator remain lit (no
blinking) when the server is in a normal operating state.

Server System-Level Status Indicators

There are seven system-level status indicators (LEDs), some of which are located on both the
server front panel and the server back panel. The following table describes these indicators.

TABLE 1 Server System-Level Status Indicators


Icon Color State and Meaning
Status
Indicator
Name
Locator LED White Indicates the location of the server.
and button
■ OFF – Server is operating normally.

■ FAST BLINK – Use Oracle ILOM to activate this LED indicator to enable you to locate a
particular system quickly and easily.
■ Pressing the Locate button will toggle the LED indicator fast blink on or off.
Service Amber Indicates the fault state of the server.
Required
■ OFF – The server is operating normally.
■ STEADY ON – A fault is present on the server. This LED indicator lights whenever a fault
indicator lights for a replaceable component on the server.

Note - When this LED indicator is lit, a system console message might appear that includes a
recommended service action.
Power/OK Green Indicates the operational state of the chassis.

■ OFF – AC power is not present or the Oracle ILOM boot is not complete.
■ STANDBY BLINK – Standby power is on, but the chassis power is off and the Oracle
ILOM SP is running.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 33


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Icon Color State and Meaning


Status
Indicator
Name
■ SLOW BLINK – Startup sequence has been initiated on the host. This pattern should begin
soon after you power on the server. This status indicates either: power-on self-test (POST)
code checkpoint tests are running on the server host system, or the host is transitioning from
the powered-on state to the standby state on shutdown.
■ STEADY ON – The server is powered on, and all host POST code checkpoint tests
are complete. The server is in one of the following states: the server host is booting the
operating system (OS), or the server host is running the OS.
SP OK Green Indicates the state of the service processor.

■ OFF – Service processor (SP) is not running.


■ SLOW BLINK – SP is booting.
■ STEADY ON – SP is fully operational.
Top Fan Top Amber Indicates that one or more of the internal fan modules have failed.

■ OFF – Indicates steady state; no service is required.


■ STEADY ON – Indicates service required.
Rear Power Rear Amber Indicates that one of the server power supplies has failed.
Supply Fault
■ OFF – Indicates steady state; no service is required.
■ STEADY ON – Indicates service required; service the power supply.
System Over Amber Indicates a warning for an overtemperature condition.
Temperature
Warning ■ OFF – Normal operation; no service is required.
■ STEADY ON – The system is experiencing an overtemperature warning condition.

Note - This is a warning indication, not a fatal overtemperature. Failure to correct this might
result in the system overheating and shutting down unexpectedly.

Server Fan Status Indicators

Each fan module has one status indicator (LED). The LEDs are located on the chassis mid-
wall adjacent to and aligned with the fan modules and are visible when the top cover fan door is
open.

TABLE 2 Server Fan Status Indicators

Status Icon Color State and Meaning


Indicator
Name
Fan Status None Amber ■ Off – The fan module is correctly installed and operating within specification.
■ Amber – The fan module is faulty. The front TOP FAN LED and the front and rear
panel Service Required LEDs are also lit if the system detects a fan module fault.

34 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Storage and Boot Drive Indicators

There are three status indicators (LEDs) on each drive.

TABLE 3 Server Front Storage and Boot Disk Drive Indicators

Status Icon Color State and Meaning


Indicator Name
OK/Activity Green ■ OFF – Power is off or installed drive is not recognized by the system.†
■ STEADY ON – The drive is engaged and is receiving power.
■ RANDOM BLINKING – There is disk activity. Status indicator LED blinks on and off to
indicate activity.
Service Amber ■ OFF – The storage drive is operating normally.
Required ■ STEADY ON – The system has detected a fault with the storage drive.
OK to Remove Blue ■ STEADY ON – The storage drive can be removed safely during a hot-plug operation.
■ OFF – The storage drive has not been prepared for removal.

If a rear backplane hard disk's OK/Activity LED shuts off, it may also indicate that a rear hard disk has spun down into a temporary "suspend" mode, in which
case the disk would again spin up when coming out of suspend mode.

Power Supply Status Indicators

There are two status indicators (LEDs) on each power supply. These indicators are visible from
the rear of the server.

TABLE 4 Server Power Supply Indicators

Status Icon Color State and Meaning


Indicator
Name
AC OK/ DC Green ■ OFF – No AC power is present.
OK ■ SLOW BLINK – Normal operation. Input power is within
specification. DC output voltage is not enabled.
■ STEADY ON – Normal operation. Input AC power and DC
output voltage are within specification.
Service Amber ■ OFF – Normal operation. No service action is required.
Required ■ STEADY ON – The power supply (PS) has detected a PS fan
failure, PS overtemperature, PS over current, or PS over or under
voltage.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 35


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Network Management Port Status Indicators

The server has one 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet management domain interface, labeled NET
MGT. There are two status indicators (LEDs) on this port. These indicators are visible from the
rear of the server.

TABLE 5 Network Management Port Status Indicators

Status Location Color State and Meaning


Indicator
Name
Activity Top right Green ■ ON – Link up.
■ OFF – No link or down link.
■ FLASHING – Packet activity.
Link speed Top left Green ■ Green ON – 1000BASE-T link.
■ OFF – 10/100BASE-T link.

Ethernet Ports Status Indicators

The server has four Gigabit Ethernet ports (NET 3, NET 2, NET 1, and NET 0). There are two
status indicators on each port. These indicators (LEDs) are visible from the rear of the server.

Note - Ethernet ports NET 2 and NET 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.

TABLE 6 Gigabit Ethernet Port Status Indicators

Status Location Color State and Meaning


Indicator Name
Activity Top left Green ■ ON – No function.
■ OFF– No activity.
■ FLASHING – Packet activity.
Link speed Top right Bicolored: Amber/ ■ OFF – 100BASE-T link.
Green ■ Amber ON – 1000BASE-T link.
■ Green ON – 10GBBASE-T link.
■ FLASHING – No function.

Motherboard Status Indicators

The motherboard contains the following status indicators (LEDs).

36 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

■ DIMM Fault Status Indicators: Each of the 24 DIMM sockets on the motherboard has
an amber fault status indicator (LED) associated with it. If Oracle ILOM determines that
a DIMM is faulty, pressing the Fault Remind button on the motherboard I/O card signals
the service processor to light the fault LED associated with the failed DIMM. For more
information on DIMM fault status indicators and the location of the Fault Remind Button,
see “Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 105.
■ Processor Fault Status Indicators: The motherboard includes a fault status indicator
(LED) adjacent to each of the two processor sockets. These LEDs indicate when a processor
fails. Pressing the Fault Remind button on the motherboard I/O card signals the service
processor to light the fault status indicators associated with the failed processors. For more
information on processor fault status indicators and the location of the Fault Remind Button,
see “Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 136.
■ Fault Remind Status Indicator: This status indicator (LED) is located next to the Fault
Remind button and is powered from the super capacitor that powers the fault LEDs on the
motherboard. This LED lights to indicate that the fault remind circuitry is working properly
in cases where no components have failed and, as a result, none of the component fault
LEDs illuminate. For more information on the fault remind status indicator and the location
of the Fault Remind Button, see “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 113.
■ STBY PWRGD Status Indicator: This green status indicator (LED) is labeled STBY
PWRGD and is located on the motherboard near the rear of the server. This LED lights
to inform a service technician that the motherboard is receiving standby power from at
least one of the power supplies. This LED is provided to help prevent service actions on
the server internal components while the AC power cords are installed and power is being
supplied to the server.

Note - The service instructions for all internal components require that all AC power be
removed from the power supplies prior to the server top cover being removed.

Troubleshooting System Cooling Issues


Maintaining the proper internal operating temperature of the server is crucial to the health of the
server. To prevent server shutdown and damage to components, address over temperature and
hardware-related issues as soon as they occur. If your server has a temperature-related fault, the
cause of the problem might be:

■ “External Ambient Temperature Too High” on page 38


■ “Airflow Blockage” on page 38
■ “Cooling Areas Compromised” on page 38
■ “Hardware Component Failure” on page 39

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 37


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

External Ambient Temperature Too High


Server component cooling relies on the movement of cool air through the server. The cool air is
pulled into the server from its external environment. If the ambient temperature of the server's
external environment is too high, cooling does not occur, and the internal temperature of the
server and its components increases. This can cause poor server performance or a failure of one
or more components.

Action: Check the ambient temperature of the server space against the environmental
specifications for the server. If the temperature is not within the required operating range,
remedy the situation immediately.

Prevention: Periodically check the ambient temperature of the server space to ensure that it
is within the required range, especially if you have made any changes to the server space (for
example, added additional servers). The temperature must be consistent and stable.

Airflow Blockage
The server cooling system uses fans to pull cool air in from the server front intake vents and
exhaust warm air out the server back panel vents. If the front or back vents are blocked, the
airflow through the server is disrupted and the cooling system fails to function properly causing
the server internal temperature to rise.

Action: Inspect the server front and back panel vents for blockage from dust or debris.
Additionally, inspect the server interior for improperly installed components or cables that can
block the flow of air through the server.

Prevention: Periodically inspect and clean the server vents using an ESD certified vacuum
cleaner. Ensure that all components, such as cards, cable, fans, air baffles and dividers are
properly installed. Never operate the server without the top cover installed.

Cooling Areas Compromised


To function properly, the server has cooling areas that are maintained by an air baffle,
component filler panels, and the server top cover. These server components need to be in place
for the server to function as a sealed system. If internal cooling areas are compromised, the
server cooling system, which relies on the movement of cool air through the server, cannot
function properly, and the airflow inside the server becomes chaotic and non-directional.

Action: Inspect the server interior to ensure that the air baffle is properly installed. Ensure that
all external-facing slots (storage drive, DVD, PCIe) are occupied with either a component or a
component filler panel. Ensure that the server top cover is in place and sits flat and snug on top
of the server.

38 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Prevention: When servicing the server, ensure that the air baffle is installed correctly and that
the server has no unoccupied external-facing slots. Never operate the server without the top
cover installed.

Hardware Component Failure


Components, such as power supplies and fan modules, are an integral part of the server cooling
system. When one of these components fails, the server internal temperature can rise. This rise
in temperature can cause other components to enter into an over-temperature state. Additionally,
some components, such as processors, might overheat when they are failing, which can also
generate an over-temperature event.

To reduce the risk related to component failure, power supplies and fan modules are installed
in pairs to provide redundancy. Redundancy ensures that if one component in the pair fails,
the other functioning component can continue to maintain the subsystem. For example, power
supplies serve a dual function; they provide both power and airflow. If one power supply fails,
the other functioning power supply can maintain both the power and the cooling subsystems.

Action: Investigate the cause of the over-temperature event, and replace failed components
immediately. For hardware troubleshooting information, see “Troubleshooting Server Hardware
Faults” on page 28.

Prevention: Component redundancy is provided to allow for component failure in critical


subsystems, such as the cooling subsystem. However, once a component in a redundant
system fails, the redundancy no longer exists, and the risk for server shutdown and component
failures increases. Therefore, it is important to maintain redundant systems and replace failed
components immediately.

Troubleshooting Power Issues


If your server does not power on, the cause of the problem might be:
■ “AC Power Connection” on page 39
■ “Power Supplies (PSUs)” on page 40
■ “Top Cover” on page 41

AC Power Connection
The AC power cords are the direct connection between the server power supplies and the power
sources. The server power supplies need separate stable AC circuits. Insufficient voltage levels

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 39


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

or fluctuations in power can cause server power problems. The power supplies are designed to
operate at a particular voltage and within an acceptable range of voltage fluctuations (refer to
“Electrical Power Requirements” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide).

Action: Check that both AC power cords are connected to the server. Check that the correct
power is present at the outlets and monitor the power to verify that it is within the acceptable
range. You can verify proper connection and operation by checking the power supply (PS)
indicator panels, which are located at the back of the server on the power supplies. Lit green AC
OK indicators show a properly functioning power supply. An amber AC OK indicator indicates
that the AC power to the power supply is insufficient.

Prevention: Use the AC power cord Velcro retaining clips and position the cords to minimize
the risk of accidental disconnection. Ensure that the AC circuits that supply power to the server
are stable and not overburdened.

Power Supplies (PSUs)

The server power supplies (PSUs) provide the necessary server voltages from the AC power
outlets. If the power supplies are inoperable, unplugged, or disengaged from the internal
connectors, the server cannot power on.

Note - The Velcro straps shown in the following figure should be used to secure the power cord
connectors to the rear of the power supplies. The Velcro retaining straps minimize the risk of
accidental disconnection.

40 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Action: Check that the AC cables are connected to both power supplies. Check that the power
supplies are operational (the PSU indicator panel should have a lit green AC OK indicator).
Ensure that the power supply is properly installed. A power supply that is not fully engaged
with its internal connector does not have power applied and does not have a lit green AC OK
indicator.

Prevention: When a power supply fails, replace it immediately. To ensure redundancy, the
server has two power supplies. This redundant configuration prevents server downtime, or
an unexpected shutdown, due to a failed power supply. The redundancy allows the server to
continue to operate if one of the power supplies fails. However, when a server is being powered
by a single power supply, the redundancy no longer exists, and the risk for downtime or an
unexpected shutdown increases. When installing a power supply, ensure that it is fully seated
and engaged with its connector inside the drive bay. A properly installed power supply has a lit
green AC OK indicator.

Top Cover
The server top cover is an important component for a properly functioning server. The top cover
is vital to the server cooling subsystem because it helps to maintain the pressure areas within
the server, and the top cover also protects against accidental exposure to hazardous voltages

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 41


Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools

and damage to internal components. For these reasons, the server top cover is interlocked to
the server power. The interlock is created by a switch that is mounted inside the server on the
housing for the power supply. The switch engages when the cover is installed, allowing power
to be applied to the server. When the cover is not installed, the server cannot power on. If the
server is powered on when the cover is removed, power is immediately switched off.

Action: If the server does not power on, check that the switch is intact and properly
aligned. Ensure that the server top cover is in place and sits flat and snug on top of the
server. Ensure that the interlock switch components have not been damaged, removed, or
misaligned. For instructions for properly installing the top cover, see “Install the Server Top
Cover” on page 230.

Prevention: After removing the top cover, take care that it does not get bent. When servicing
the server, take care that the internally mounted interlock switch component does not get
damaged or misaligned. Never operate the server without the top cover installed.

Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the


Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell
The Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell enables you to view and manage fault activity on a
managed servers and other types of devices.

For more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell, refer to the
Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and Diagnostics Firmware Release 5.0.x in
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.
oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools

The server and its accompanying software and firmware contain diagnostic tools and features
that can help you isolate component problems, monitor the status of a functioning system,
and exercise one or more subsystem to disclose more subtle or intermittent hardware-related
problems.

Each diagnostic tool has its own specific strength and application. Review the tools listed in
this section and determine which tool might be best to use for your situation. Once you have
determined the tool to use, you can access it locally, while at the server, or remotely.
■ “Diagnostic Tools” on page 43

42 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools

■ “Diagnostic Tool Documentation” on page 44

Diagnostic Tools
The selection of diagnostic tools available for your server range in complexity from a
comprehensive validation test suite (Oracle VTS) to a chronological event log (Oracle ILOM
System Log). The selection of diagnostic tools also includes standalone software packages,
firmware-based tests, and hardware-based LED indicators.

The following table summarizes the diagnostic tools that you can use when troubleshooting or
monitoring your server.

Diagnostic Tool Type What It Does Accessibility Remote Capability


Oracle ILOM SP firmware Monitors environmental Can function on either Designed for
condition and component standby power mode or remote and local
functionality sensors, generates full power mode and is access.
alerts, performs fault isolation, not OS dependent.
and provides remote access.
Preboot Menu SP firmware Enables you to restore some Can function on standby Local, but remote
Oracle ILOM default settings power and when serial access is
when Oracle ILOM is not operating system is not possible if the
accessible. running. SP serial port is
connected to a
network-accessible
terminal server.
Hardware-based Hardware Indicates status of overall Available when system Local, but sensor
LED indicators and SP system and particular power is available. and indicators are
firmware components. accessible from
Oracle ILOM
web interface or
command-line
interface (CLI).
Power-On Self- Host Tests core components of Runs on startup. Local, but can be
Test (POST) firmware system: CPUs, memory, Available when the accessed through
and motherboard I/O bridge operating system is not Oracle ILOM
integrated circuits. running. Remote System
Console Plus.
U-Boot SP firmware Initializes and test aspects of Can function on standby Local, but remote
the service processor (SP) prior power and when serial access is
to booting the Oracle ILOM SP operating system is not possible if the
and operating system. Tests SP running. SP serial port is
memory, SP, network devices connected to a
and I/O devices. network-accessible
terminal server.
UEFI SP firmware The UEFI diagnostics can You can use either Remote access
Diagnostics test and detect problems on the Oracle ILOM through Oracle

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 43


Attaching Devices to the Server

Diagnostic Tool Type What It Does Accessibility Remote Capability


all processors, memory, disk web interface or the ILOM Remote
drives, and network ports. It is command-line interface System Console
used on newer Oracle systems, (CLI) to run UEFI Plus.
such as the Oracle Server X6- diagnostics.
2L.
Oracle Solaris Operating Displays various kinds of Requires operating Local, and over
commands system system information. system. network.
software
Oracle Linux Operating Displays various kinds of Requires operating Local, and over
commands system system information. system. network.
software
Oracle VTS Diagnostic Exercises and stresses the Requires the Solaris View and control
tool system, running tests in operating system. Install over network.
standalone parallel. Oracle VTS software
software separately.

Diagnostic Tool Documentation


The following table identifies where you can find more information about diagnostic tools.

Diagnostic Tool Documentation Location


Oracle ILOM Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager 5.0 https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/
Documentation Library docs
Preboot Menu Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics Guide https://www.oracle.com/goto/
x86admindiag/docs
System indicators and This document “Troubleshooting Using the Server
sensors Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators
” on page 32
U-Boot or UEFI Diags Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics Guide https://www.oracle.com/goto/
x86admindiag/docs
Oracle VTS Oracle VTS software and documentation https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19719-
01/index.html

Attaching Devices to the Server

The following sections contain procedural information for attaching devices to the server so you
can access diagnostic tools when troubleshooting and servicing the server:
■ “Attach Devices to the Server” on page 45

44 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Attach Devices to the Server

■ “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 45


■ “Configuring Serial Port Sharing” on page 47
■ “Server Operating System Names for the NVMe Storage Drives” on page 48
■ “Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming” on page 49
■ “Rear Panel Pinhole Switches” on page 50

Attach Devices to the Server

This procedure explains how to connect devices to the server (remotely and locally), so that you
can interact with the service processor (SP) and the server console.

1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the Gigabit Ethernet (NET) connectors as needed


for OS support.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 45.

2. To connect to the service processor's Oracle ILOM over the network, connect an
Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port labeled NET MGT.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 45.

3. To access the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) locally using the
management port, connect a serial null modem cable to the RJ-45 serial port
labeled SER MGT.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 45.

4. To interact with the system console locally, connect a mouse and keyboard to
the USB connectors and a monitor to the DB-15 video connector.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 45.

Rear Panel Connector Locations


The following illustration shows and describes the locations of the back panel connectors. Use
this information to set up the server, so that you can access diagnostic tools and manage the
server during service.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 45


Attach Devices to the Server

No. Cable Port or Expansion Slot Description


1 Power supply 0 input power The server has two power supply connectors, one for each power supply.

Power supply 1 input power Do not attach power cables to the power supplies until you have finished
connecting the data cables to the server. The server goes into standby power
mode, and the Oracle ILOM service processor initializes when the AC
power cables are connected to the power source. System messages might
be lost after 60 seconds if the server is not connected to a terminal, PC, or
workstation.
Note - Oracle ILOM will signal a fault on any installed power supply that
is not connected to an AC power source, since it might indicate a loss of
redundancy.
2 Network management port (NET MGT) The service processor NET MGT port is the optional connection to the
Oracle ILOM service processor. The NET MGT port is configured by default
to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). The service processor
NET MGT port uses an RJ-45 cable for a 10/100/1000BASE-T connection.
3 Serial management port (SER MGT) The service processor SER MGT port uses an RJ-45 cable and is the default
connection to the Oracle ILOM service processor. This port supports local
connections to the server and only recognizes Oracle ILOM command-line
interface (CLI) commands. Typically you connect a terminal or terminal
emulator to this port.
Note - This port does not support network connections.
4 Ethernet ports (NET 3, NET 2, NET 1, NET 0) The four 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports enable you to connect the system to the
network.

46 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI

No. Cable Port or Expansion Slot Description


Note - Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-processor
systems.
5, 6 USB ports (USB 0, USB 1) The two USB ports support hot-plugging. You can connect and disconnect
USB cables and peripheral devices while the server is running without
affecting system operations.
7 Video port (VGA) Use a 15-pin video cable to connect a VGA video device to the server.
Optionally, you can connect to the VGA port when installing the operating
system.

Configuring Serial Port Sharing

By default, the SP console (SER MGT) port sends serial port output from the server. Using
Oracle ILOM, you can specify that the host console (COM1) be assigned as owner of the server
serial port output. This feature is useful for Windows kernel debugging, as it enables you to
view non-ASCII character traffic from the host console.

You should set up the network on the SP before attempting to change the serial port owner to
the host server. If the network is not set up, and you switch the serial port owner to the host
server, you will be unable to connect using the CLI or web interface to change the serial port
owner back to the SP. To return the serial port owner setting to the SP, you need to restore
access to the serial port on the server. For more details about restoring access to the server
port on your server, see the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation
Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

You can assign serial port output using either the Oracle ILOM web interface or the command-
line interface (CLI). For instructions, see the following sections:

■ “Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI” on page 47


■ “Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface” on page 48

Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI


1. Open an SSH session and at the command line log in to the SP Oracle ILOM CLI.
Log in as a user with root or administrator privileges. For example:
ssh root@ipaddress

Where ipaddress is the IP address of the server SP.


For more information, see “Accessing Oracle ILOM” in the Oracle X5 Series Servers
Administration Guide.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 47


Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface

The Oracle ILOM CLI prompt (->) appears.

2. To set the serial port owner, type:


-> set /SP/serial/portsharing owner=host

Note - The serial port sharing value by default is owner=SP.

3. Connect a serial host to the server.

Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface

1. Log in to the SP Oracle ILOM web interface.


To log in, open a web browser and direct it using the IP address of the server SP. Log in as root
or a user with administrator privileges. See “Accessing Oracle ILOM” in the Oracle X6 Series
Servers Administration Guide.
The Summary Information screen appears.

2. In the Oracle ILOM web interface, select ILOM Administration → Connectivity


from the navigation menu on the left side of the screen.

3. Select the Serial Port tab.


The Serial Port Settings page appears.

Note - The serial port sharing setting by default is Service Processor.

4. In the Serial Port Settings page, select Host Server as the serial port owner.

5. Click Save for the changes to take effect.

6. Connect a serial host to the server.

Server Operating System Names for the NVMe


Storage Drives
If the optional NVMe storage drives are installed in the server's front panel, they are labeled
NVMe0, NVMe1, NVMe2, and NVMe3. However, the server operating systems assign these

48 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface

storage drives different names. For the corresponding names assigned by the operating systems,
see the following table.

TABLE 7 Operating System NVMe Storage Drive Nomenclature

Storage Drive Labels Names Assigned by the Server Operating Systems


NVMe0 PCI-Express Slot 10
NVMe1 PCI-Express Slot 11
NVMe2 PCI-Express Slot 12
NVMe3 PCI-Express Slot 13

Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming

This section contains information about the boot order and device naming for the four 10-
Gigabit Ethernet ports on the rear panel of the server. For location information, see “Rear Panel
Connector Locations” on page 45. From right to left, the ports are numbered NET 0 to NET
3.

Ethernet Port Boot Order

The order in which the BIOS detects the Ethernet ports during server boot is listed below.

Note - You can change the boot priority using the Boot Device Priority screen available in the
Boot menu of the BIOS Setup Utility.

1. NET 0
2. NET 1
3. NET 2
4. NET 3

Ethernet Port Device Naming

Note - Naming used by the interfaces might vary from that listed below depending on which
devices are installed in the system.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 49


Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface

The device naming for the Ethernet interfaces is reported differently by different interfaces and
operating systems. The following table shows BIOS (physical) and operating system (logical)
naming conventions used for each interface. These naming conventions might vary depending
on conventions of your operating system and which devices are installed in the server.

Port BIOS Solaris Linux Windows (example default


names, see note below)
NET 0 3A00 ixgbe 0 eth 0 Ethernet
NET 1 3A01 ixgbe 1 eth 1 Ethernet 2
NET 2 8200 ixgbe 2 eth 2 Ethernet 3
NET 3 8201 ixgbe 3 eth 3 Ethernet 4

Note - For Windows, port names like Ethernet, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3, and Ethernet 4 are used
by default. However, actual port naming is based on the order of enumeration, typically during
operating system installation. Additionally, Windows allows you to rename the ports to meet
application-specific needs.

Rear Panel Pinhole Switches


This section shows the location of the rear panel pinhole switches.

50 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface

FIGURE 2 Rear Panel Pinhole Switches

Figure Legend Description


1 SP Reset
2 Host Warm Reset
3 Non-maskable interrupt
(NMI)†

Oracle Service use only.

Caution - Using a conductive tool, such as a metal paper clip or graphite pencil, can cause a
short that can cause an immediate host power off, and/or circuit damage.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 51


Getting Help

Getting Help
The following sections describe how to get additional help to resolve server-related problems.
■ “Contacting Support” on page 52
■ “Locating the Chassis Serial Number” on page 53

Contacting Support

If the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter fail to solve your problem, use the following
table to collect information that you might need to communicate to support personnel.

System Configuration Your Information


Information Needed
Service contract number
System model
Operating environment
System serial number
Peripherals attached to the system
Email address and phone number
for you and a secondary contact
Street address where the system is
located
Superuser password
Summary of the problem and
the work being done when the
problem occurred
Other Useful Information

IP address
Server name (system host name)
Network or internet domain name
Proxy server configuration

Related Information
■ “Locating the Chassis Serial Number” on page 53

52 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Getting Help

Locating the Chassis Serial Number

You might need to have your server serial number when you ask for service on your system.
Record this number for future use. Use one of the following resources or methods to locate your
server serial number.
■ The serial number is located on the Radio-frequency Identification (RFID) label on the
bottom left side of the front panel bezel, below the general status LEDs.
For illustrations of the storage cell front panel, see “About Controls and
Connectors” on page 16.
■ The serial number is recorded on the service label that is attached to the top cover of the
system.
■ The serial number is recorded on the yellow Customer Information Sheet (CIS) that is
attached to your storage cell packaging.
■ Locate the yellow Customer Information Sheet (CIS) attached to your server packaging.
This sheet includes the serial number.
■ Using Oracle ILOM:
■ From the command-line interface (CLI), type the command: show/SYS.
■ From the web interface, view the serial number on the System Information screen.

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 53


54 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
Preparing for Service

These sections describe safety considerations and provide prerequisite procedures and
information about replacing components within the server.

Description Links
Understand the safety precautions, understand the “Safety Precautions” on page 55
safety symbols, and take ESD precautions prior to
removing or installing parts in the server. “Safety Symbols” on page 56

“Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56


Understand the key identity properties auto-update “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
feature. Update” on page 57
Assemble the required tools. “Required Tools” on page 58
Before working with components within the server, “Preparing the Server for Component
power down the server and prepare for servicing. Replacement” on page 59

Related Information
■ “Returning the Server to Operation” on page 229

Safety Precautions

For your protection, observe the following safety precautions when setting up your equipment:

■ Follow all standard cautions, warnings, and instructions marked on the equipment and
described in the Oracle Server X6-2L Safety and Compliance Guide and Important Safety
Information for Oracle's Hardware Systems.
■ Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source match the voltage and
frequency inscribed on the equipment electrical rating label.
■ Follow the electrostatic discharge safety practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 56.

Preparing for Service 55


Safety Symbols

■ Disconnect both power supply cords before servicing components.

Related Information
■ “Safety Symbols” on page 56
■ “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56

Safety Symbols

The following symbols might appear in this document. Note their meanings.

Caution - Risk of personal injury or equipment damage. To avoid personal injury or


equipment damage, follow the instructions.

Caution - Hot surface. Avoid contact. Surfaces are hot and might cause personal injury if
touched.

Caution - Hazardous voltages are present. To reduce the risk of electric shock and danger to
personal health, follow the instructions.

Related Information
■ “Safety Precautions” on page 55
■ “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56

Electrostatic Discharge Safety

Devices that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD), such as the motherboard, PCIe cards,
drives, processors, and memory DIMMs require special handling.

Caution - The boards and drives contain electronic components that are extremely sensitive to
static electricity. Ordinary amounts of static electricity from clothing or the work environment
can destroy components. Do not touch the components along their connector edges.

56 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update

Do the following when handling ESD-sensitive components:

■ Use an antistatic wrist strap.


Wear an antistatic wrist strap and use an antistatic mat when handling components such as
drive assemblies, boards, or cards. When servicing or removing server components, attach
an antistatic strap to your wrist and then to a metal area on the chassis. Then disconnect
the power cords from the server. Following this practice equalizes the electrical potentials
between you and the server.

Note - An antistatic wrist strap is not included in the Accessory Kit for the server. However,
antistatic wrist straps are included with options and components.

■ Use an antistatic mat.


Place ESD-sensitive components such as the motherboard, memory DIMMS, and other
printed circuit board (PCB) cards on an antistatic mat. The following items can be used as
an antistatic mat:
■ An antistatic bag used to wrap an Oracle replacement part
■ An Oracle ESD mat (orderable item)
■ A disposable ESD mat (shipped with some replacement parts or optional system
components)

Related Information
■ “Safety Precautions” on page 55
■ “Safety Symbols” on page 56
■ “Preparing the Server for Component Replacement” on page 59
■ “Returning the Server to Operation” on page 229

FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update

Oracle ILOM includes a key identity properties (KIP) auto-update feature that ensures product
information that is used for service entitlement and warranty coverage is accurately maintained
by the server at all times, including during hardware replacement activities.

The KIP includes the server product name, product part number (PPN), and product serial
number (PSN). The KIP are stored in the FRUID (field-replaceable unit identifiers) container of
the three server FRUs that are designated quorum members.

Preparing for Service 57


Required Tools

The quorum members include:

■ Disk backplane (DBP), designated as a primary quorum member.


■ Motherboard (MB), designated as a backup quorum member.
■ Power supply (PS), designated as a backup quorum member.

When a server FRU that contains the KIP is removed and a replacement component is installed,
the KIP of the replacement component is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same
KIP as the other two components.

Note - Only one of the quorum members can be replaced at a time. Automated updates can only
be completed when two of the three quorum members contain matching key identity properties.

Related Information
■ “Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 99
■ “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150
■ “Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)” on page 212

Required Tools

The server can be serviced with the following tools:

■ Antistatic wrist strap


■ Antistatic mat
■ Hex/flat head screwdriver
■ No. 2 Phillips screwdriver

Related Information

■ “Preparing for Service” on page 55


■ “Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off” on page 75
■ “Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off” on page 105
■ “Servicing FRUs” on page 135

58 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Preparing the Server for Component Replacement

Preparing the Server for Component Replacement

Note - When you are replacing the storage drives or power supplies, not all of these procedures
are necessary. See the replacement procedures for those components for more information.

Before you can remove and install components that are inside the server, you must perform the
procedures in the following sections:

■ “Powering Down the Server” on page 59


■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66
■ “Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 67
■ “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68
■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69
■ “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70
■ “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72

Related Information
■ “Returning the Server to Operation” on page 229

Powering Down the Server

Determine how you want to power down the server by reviewing the options in the following
table.

Description Link
Power down the server gracefully to prevent data from being ■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
corrupted. Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that the Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 60
system is ready for restart. ■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 61
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
Power Button” on page 62
If the server is not responding, or you must shut down the ■ “Power Down the Server for
server quickly, perform an immediate shutdown. Immediate Shutdown Using the Power
Button” on page 63

Preparing for Service 59


Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI

Description Link
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate
Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 63
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate
Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 64

Related Information

■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI

Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that all of your data is saved and the system is ready
for restart.

1. Log in to the server as superuser or equivalent.


Depending on the nature of the problem, you might want to view the system status or the log
files or run diagnostics before you shut down the system. For log file information, refer to the
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation at https://www.oracle.
com/goto/ilom/docs.

2. Notify affected users that the server will be powered down.

3. Save any open files, and quit all running applications.


Refer to your application documentation for specific information about these processes.

4. Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) using an Administrator


account.
For instructions, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation
Collection.

5. At the Oracle ILOM prompt, shut down the operating system:

-> stop /System

If the system is running the Oracle Solaris OS, refer to the Oracle Solaris system administration
documentation for additional information.

6. Disconnect the power and cables from the server.

60 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 61
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button” on page 62
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 63
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM


Web Interface

Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that all of your data is saved and the system is ready
for restart.

1. Log in to the server as superuser or equivalent.


Depending on the nature of the problem, you might want to view the system status or the log
files or run diagnostics before you shut down the system. For log file information, refer to the
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation at https://www.oracle.
com/goto/ilom/docs.

2. Notify affected users that the server will be powered down.

3. Save any open files, and quit all running applications.


Refer to your application documentation for specific information about these processes.

4. Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface using an Administrator account.


The Oracle ILOM web interface System Information → Summary Information page appears.

5. In the left pane, click Host Management → Power Control, and click Graceful
Shutdown and Power Off from the Select Action list.

6. Click Save, and then click OK.


The host server performs an orderly power-down.

Preparing for Service 61


Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button

7. Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 60
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button” on page 62
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 63
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button

1. Press and quickly release the Power button on the front panel.
This action causes ACPI-enabled operating systems to perform an orderly shutdown of the
operating system. Servers not running ACPI-enabled operating systems shut down to standby
power mode immediately.
When main power is off, the Power/OK LED on the front panel begins flashing, indicating that
the server is in standby power mode. See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33.

2. Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using the Power button, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 60
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 61
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

62 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button

Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the


Power Button

Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.

1. Press and hold the Power button for four seconds to force the main power off
and to enter standby power mode.
When main power is off, the Power/OK LED on the front panel begins flashing, indicating that
the server is in standby power mode. See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33.

2. Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using the Power button, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 63
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 64
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the


Oracle CLI

Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.

1. Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) using an Administrator


account.

Preparing for Service 63


Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Oracle ILOM displays the default command prompt (->), indicating that you have successfully
logged in to Oracle ILOM.

2. From the CLI prompt, type the following command:


-> stop -f /System
The server powers down immediately.

3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the server.


See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 63
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 64
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the


Oracle ILOM Web Interface

Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.

1. Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface using an Administrator account.


The Oracle ILOM web interface System Information → Summary Information page appears.

2. In the left pane, click Host Management → Power Control, and click Immediate
Power Off in the Select Action list.

3. Click Save, and then click OK.


The server powers down immediately.

4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the server.

64 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Disconnect Cables From the Server

See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65.

Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.

Related Information
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 63
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 63
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Disconnect Cables From the Server

Caution - The system supplies standby power to the circuit boards even when the system is
powered off.

1. Label all cables connected to the server.

2. Power down the server.


See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

3. Disconnect the power cords from the rear of the server.

4. Disconnect all data cables from the rear of the server.

5. If your rackmount kit includes a cable management device, remove the cables
from it.

6. Depending on the components that you are servicing, either extend the server to
the maintenance position, or remove the server from the rack.

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Powering Down the Server” on page 59
■ “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66
■ “Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 67

Preparing for Service 65


Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position

■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position


The following components can be serviced with the server in the maintenance position:

■ Storage drives
■ Fan modules
■ Power supplies
■ DVD drive
■ DDR4 DIMMs
■ PCIe cards and cables
■ SAS cables
■ NVMe cables
■ Internal USB drives
■ System battery
■ Processors
■ Disk backplanes
■ Front indicator modules
■ Motherboard

If the server is installed in a rack with extendable slide-rails, use this procedure to extend the
server to the maintenance position.

1. To prevent the rack from tipping forward when the server is extended, extend all
rack anti-tilt devices.
For instructions for stabilizing the rack, refer to “Stabilize the Rack for Installation” in Oracle
Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

2. Verify that no cables will be damaged or will interfere when the server is
extended.
Although the cable management arm (CMA) that is supplied with the server is hinged to
accommodate extending the server, you should ensure that all cables and cords are capable of
extending.

3. From the front of the server, open and hold the left and right release latch covers
in the open position.
When in an open position, the release latch covers engage the slide-rail release latches [1].

66 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Server From the Rack

Caution - Deploy any rack anti-tilt mechanism before releasing the slide-rail release latches.

4. While the release latch covers are in the open position, slowly pull the server
forward until the slide-rails latch into a locked position [2].
The server is now in the extended maintenance position.

Related Information
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 67
■ “Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 234

Remove the Server From the Rack

Caution - The server weighs approximately 63 pounds (28.5 kg). Two people are required to
unmount and carry the chassis.

1. Disconnect all the cables and power cords from the server.

Preparing for Service 67


Take Antistatic Measures

2. Remove the cable management arm (CMA).


For instructions for removing the CMA, see the “Remove the Cable Management Arm” in
Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

3. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

4. From the front of the server, pull the green slide-rail release tabs toward the front
of the server, and pull the server out of the rack until it is free of the rack rails [1
and 2].
A slide-rail release tab is located on each slide-rail.

5. Set the server on a sturdy work surface.

Related Information
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66
■ “Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 234

Take Antistatic Measures


1. Prepare an antistatic surface on which to set parts during removal and
installation.
Place electrostatic discharge (ESD-sensitive components on an antistatic mat. The following
items can be used as an antistatic mat:

68 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Server Top Cover

■ An antistatic bag used to wrap a replacement part


■ An Oracle ESD mat (orderable item)
■ A disposable ESD mat (shipped with some replacement parts or optional system
components)

2. Attach an antistatic wrist strap.


When servicing or removing server components, attach an antistatic strap to your wrist and then
to a metal area on the chassis. Then perform procedures for servicing the server.

Note - An antistatic wrist strap is not included in the Accessory Kit for the server. However,
antistatic wrist straps are included with options and components.

Related Information

■ “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66


■ “Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 67
■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69
■ “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70
■ “Remove Antistatic Measures” on page 234

Remove the Server Top Cover

Caution - If you remove the top cover without first removing the AC power cords, then not
only will the server host shut down, but also this condition will be flagged as a system fault
(that is, the fault LEDs will light).

Note - Servicing some components requires that the top cover be removed.

1. Ensure that AC power cords are disconnected from the server power supplies.

2. Unlatch the top cover [1].

Preparing for Service 69


Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server

Press the green release button on the top of the server cover.

3. While pressing the top cover release button, slide the cover toward the rear of
the server [2].

4. If necessary, open the fan assembly door.

5. Lift up and remove the top cover [2].

Related Information
■ “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68
■ “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70
■ “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230

Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server

Before you service the server's storage drive backplane, you should first remove the server's
front fan assembly door.

Note - This procedure is only required for systems configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage
drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives. If your system is configured with eight 2.5-inch
storage drives, see “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

70 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server

1. Ensure that the AC power cords are disconnected from the server power
supplies.

2. Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the fan
assembly door [1].

■ If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, remove the
two screws on each side of the chassis and the three screws on top of the
chassis.

■ If your system is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,


remove the two screws on each side of the chassis.

3. Slide the fan assembly door toward the rear of the server, and lift and remove the
door from the chassis [2].

Related Information

■ “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68


■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69
■ “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230
■ “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232

Preparing for Service 71


Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server

Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server

Before you service the server's storage drive backplane, you should first remove the server's
disk cage cover.

Note - This procedure is only required for systems configured with eight 2.5-inch storage
drives. If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch
storage drives, see “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

1. Ensure that the AC power cords are disconnected from the server power
supplies.

72 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the twelve screws (three on each top
side of the chassis, and three on each side of the chassis) that secure the disk
cage cover [1].

3. Slide the cover forward and lift to remove the disk cage cover from the chassis
[2].

Related Information

■ “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68

Preparing for Service 73


Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server

■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69


■ “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230
■ “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233

74 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server
Power-Off

These sections describe how to service customer-replaceable units (CRUs) that do not
require you to power off the server. For more information about CRUs, see “Illustrated Parts
Breakdown” on page 22 and “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24.

Description Links
Service storage and boot drives. “Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives
(CRU)” on page 75
Service fan modules. “Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 93
Service power supplies. “Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 99

Related Information

■ “Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off” on page 105


■ “Servicing FRUs” on page 135

Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)


These sections describe how to remove and install storage drives.

■ “Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 76


■ “Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 76
■ “Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77
■ “Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris” on page 83
■ “Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux” on page 86
■ “Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive” on page 90

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 75


Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)

Related Information
■ “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171
■ “Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 177

Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions

The hard-disk drives (HDDs), solid-state drives (SSDs), and NVMe SSD drives installed in the
server are hot-pluggable, but this capability depends on how the drives are configured. To hot-
plug a drive you must be able to take the drive offline before you can remove it. When you take
the drive offline, you prevent any application from accessing the drive and remove the logical
software links to the drive.

The following conditions inhibit the ability to perform hot-plugging of a drive:


■ The drive provides the operating system, and the operating system is not mirrored on
another drive.
■ The drive cannot be logically isolated from the online operations of the server.

If either of the disk drive conditions is true, then you must shut down the system before you
replace the drive. See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

Note - Replacing a drive does not require removing the server from a rack.

Related Information
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77
■ “Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris” on page 83
■ “Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux” on page 86
■ “Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive” on page 90

Storage Drive Failure and RAID


A single storage drive failure does not cause a data failure if the storage drives are configured
as a mirrored RAID 1 volume (optional). The storage drive can be removed, and when a new
storage drive is inserted, the contents are automatically rebuilt from the rest of the array with no
need to reconfigure the RAID parameters. If the replaced storage drive was configured as a hot-
spare, the new HDD is automatically configured as a new hot-spare.

76 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

For information about the implementation of RAID on this server, refer to “Configuring Storage
Drives for Operating System Installation” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage


Drive
The following sections describe how to remove and replace an HDD or SSD storage drive.

■ “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77


■ “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82

Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

1. Prepare the system for the drive removal.


Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

2. Identify the location of the drive that you want to remove.


The following illustrations show the location of the drives and the internal system software
designations for the drives. For information on storage drive status indicators (LEDs), refer to
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 77


Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

Callout Description
1 Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
2 Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
3 Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD/
NVMe 0)
4 Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD/
NVMe 1)
5 Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD/
NVMe 2)
6 Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD/
NVMe 3)
7 Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
8 Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
9 Optional SATA DVD drive

Callout Description
1 Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
2 Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD)
3 Storage drive 8 (HDD/SSD)
4 Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
5 Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD)
6 Storage drive 9 (HDD/SSD)
7 Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD)

78 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

Callout Description
8 Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
9 Storage drive 10 (HDD/
SSD)
10 Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD)
11 Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
12 Storage drive 11 (HDD/
SSD)

Callout Description
1 Storage drives 0 through 11
(HDD/SSD; Storage drives
3 and 4: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
2 Storage drives 12 through
23 (HDD/SSD; Storage
drives 19 and 20: HDD/
SSD/NVMe)

3. If you are removing an HDD or SSD storage drive, type the required operating
system commands to stop the server from using the drive; otherwise, proceed to
the next step.
The exact commands required depend on the configuration of your drives. Unmount file
systems, or issue RAID commands as needed.

Note - The blue OK to Remove status indicator LED on the drive may or may not light, as
support for this varies depending on the operating system in use.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 79


Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

4. On the drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the drive
latch [1, 2].

Callout Description
1 Pressing the latch release
button.
2 Opening the latch.

Caution - The latch is not an ejector. Do not open the latch too far to the right. Doing so can
damage the latch.

80 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

5. Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.

6. Consider your next steps:

■ If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Install an HDD or SSD Storage
Drive” on page 82.
■ If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 230.

Related Information

■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35


■ “Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 76
■ “Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 76
■ “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82
■ “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 92

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 81


Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive

1. Remove the replacement drive from its packaging, and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.

2. If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.

3. Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.


The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.

4. Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.

5. Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.

6. Perform administrative procedures to reconfigure the drive.


The procedures that you perform at this point depend on how your data is configured. You
might need to partition the drive, create file systems, load data from backups, or have the drive
updated from a RAID configuration.

Related Information
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35

82 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive

■ “Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 76


■ “Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 76
■ “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77
■ “Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 90

Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive


Using Oracle Solaris
Note - NVMe storage drives are supported only on servers that are running the Oracle Solaris or
Oracle Linux operating systems. Servers that are running Oracle VM, Windows Server, or Red
Hat Enterprise Linux do not support NVMe drives.

The following sections describe how to remove and replace an NVMe storage drive on a server
that is running the Oracle Solaris operating system.
■ “Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 83
■ “Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server” on page 84
■ “Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 84
■ “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server” on page 85
■ “Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver” on page 85

Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive


1. Log in to Oracle Solaris that is running on the server.

2. To find the NVMe drive slot number, type:


# hotplug list –lc
This command produces output similar to the following for each of the NVMe drives installed
in the server:
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State Description
Path
------------------------------------------------------------------
pcie13 ENABLED PCIe-Native /pci@7a,0/pci8086,2f08@3/pci111d,80b5@4

3. To prepare the NVMe drive for removal, that is, detach the device driver and
power off the drive slot, type the following commands:
# hotplug poweroff pcie13

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 83


Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server

# hotplug list –lc


The following output appears for the NVMe drive that has been unmounted:
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State Description
Path
------------------------------------------------------------------
pcie13 PRESENT PCIe-Native /pci@7a,0/pci8086,2f08@3/pci111d,80b5@4

4. Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe storage drive is lit.

Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server

Perform this procedure to physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server.

1. Identify the physical location of the NVMe drive that you want to remove.
For storage drive locations, see “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

2. Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe storage drive is lit.

3. On the drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the drive
latch.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

4. Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.

5. Consider your next steps:


■ If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Verify Removal of an NVMe
Storage Drive” on page 84, and then “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the
Server” on page 85.
■ If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 230.

Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive


To verify that the NVMe drive has been removed, type:
# hotplug list –lc

84 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server

The following output appears for the NVMe drive that you removed:

# hotplug list –lc


Connection State Description
Path
------------------------------------------------------------------
pcie13 EMPTY PCIe-Native /pci@7a,0/pci8086,2f08@3/pci111d,80b5@4

Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server

Perform this procedure to physically install an NVMe storage drive into the server.

Note - After you physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server, wait at least 10
seconds before installing a replacement drive.

1. Remove the replacement drive from its packaging and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.

2. If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.

3. Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.


The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.

4. Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.
See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82.

5. Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.

Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver


1. Type: # hotplug enable pcie13

2. Type: # hotplug list –lc


The following status is displayed for the NVMe storage drive.

# hotplug list –lc


Connection State Description
Path
------------------------------------------------------------------
pcie13 Enabled PCIe-Native /pci@7a,0/pci8086,2f08@3/pci111d,80b5@4

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 85


Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive

3. To check the NVMe drive health, firmware level, temperature, get error log,
SMART data, security erase, low level format, etc., type:
# nvmeadm list

Related Information
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 76
■ “Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 76
■ “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77
■ “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82

Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive


Using Oracle Linux
Note - NVMe storage drives are supported only on servers that are running the Oracle Solaris or
Oracle Linux operating systems. Servers that are running Oracle VM, Windows Server, or Red
Hat Enterprise Linux do not support NVMe drives.

The following sections describe how to remove and replace an NVMe storage drive on a server
that is running the Oracle Linux operating system.
■ “Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 86
■ “Remove an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 88
■ “Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 89
■ “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server” on page 89
■ “Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver” on page 90
■ “Verify Operation of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 90

Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive


1. Log in to Oracle Linux that is running on the server.

2. Remove the NVMe storage device path.

a. To find the PCIe addresses (Bus Device Function), type:


# find /sys/devices |egrep ‘nvme[0-9][0-9]?$’

86 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive

This commands returns output similar to the following:

/sys/devices/pci0000:80/0000:80:03.0/0000:b0:00.0/0000:b1:04.0/0000:b2:00.0/misc/
nvme0
/sys/devices/pci0000:80/0000:80:03.0/0000:b0:00.0/0000:b1:05.0/0000:b4:00.0/misc/
nvme1

In the above listing, the PCIe addresses are highlighted in bold text.

b. To obtain the slot number (APIC ID) for the bus address, type the following
command to list all of the PCIe slot numbers and the corresponding bus
addresses:
# egrep –H ‘.*’ /sys/bus/pci/slots/*/address
This commands returns output similar to the following:

/sys/bus/pci/slots/10/address:0000:b8:00
/sys/bus/pci/slots/11/address:0000:b6:00
/sys/bus/pci/slots/12/address:0000:b2:00 (instance nvme0, pcie slot 12, drive
label nvme2)
/sys/bus/pci/slots/13/address:0000:b4:00 (instance nvme1, pcie slot 13, drive
label nvme3)

In the above output, the bus addresses for the corresponding NVMe instances are
highlighted in bold text.

Note - In the above output, notice that the instance names for the NVMe drives does not
correspond to the NVMe drive labels on the front of the server, that is, pci/slots/12/address:
0000:b2:00 corresponds to instance nvme0; however, on the front of the server, this drive is
labeled NVMe2. For a table that shows the relationship between the pci/slot# and the NVMe
storage drive label on the front of the server, see “Server Operating System Names for the
NVMe Storage Drives” on page 48.

c. Disconnect all users of the NVMe drive and back up the NVMe drive data as
needed.

i. Use the umount command to unmount any file systems that are mounted
on the device.

ii. Remove the device from any multiple device (md) and Logical Volume
Manager (LVM) volume using it.
If the device is a member of an LVM Volume group, then it may be necessary
to move data off the device using the pvmove command, then use the vgreduce

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 87


Remove an NVMe Storage Drive

command to remove the physical volume, and (optionally) pvremove to remove the
LVM meta data from the disk.

iii. If the device uses multipathing, run multipath -l and note all the paths
to the device. Then, remove the multipathed device using the multipath
-f device command.

iv. Run the blockdev --flushbufs device command to flush any outstanding
I/O to all paths to the device.

3. To prepare the NVMe drive for removal, that is, detach the NVMe device driver
and power off the NVMe drive slot, type:
# echo 0 > /sys/bus/pci/slots/$slot/power
Where $slot is the slot number obtained in step Step 2b above.

4. Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe drive is lit.

Remove an NVMe Storage Drive

Perform this procedure to physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server.

1. Identify the location of the NVMe drive that you want to remove.
For storage drive locations, see “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

2. Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe drive is lit.

3. On the NVMe drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the
drive latch.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

4. Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.

5. Consider your next steps:

■ If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Verify Removal of an NVMe


Storage Drive” on page 89, and then “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the
Server” on page 89.
■ If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.

88 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive

For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 230.

Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive


1. To check the NVMe drive enumeration so as to verify that NVMe drive has been
removed, type:
# lspci -nnd :0953

2. View the command output and verify that the entry for the slot number that was
disabled no longer appears.
This commands returns output similar to the following:

b2:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953]


(rev 01)
b6:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953]
(rev 01)
b8:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953]
(rev 01)

Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server

Perform this procedure to physically install an NVMe storage drive into the server.

Note - After you physically remove an NVMe drive from the server, wait at least 10 seconds
before installing a replacement drive.

1. Remove the replacement drive from its packaging and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.

2. If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.

3. Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.


The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.

4. Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.
See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82.

5. Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 89


Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver

Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver

To power on the slot and attach the device driver, type:


# echo 1 /sys/bus/pci/slots/$slot/power
Where $slot is the slot number for the NVMe storage drive.

Verify Operation of an NVMe Storage Drive

To verify that an NVMe drive is operating properly, do one of the following:


■ Check the /var/log/messages log file.
■ Type: ls -l /dev/nvme*.

Related Information
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 76
■ “Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 76
■ “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77
■ “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82

Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive


The following sections describe how to remove and replace a rear storage drive.
■ “Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 90
■ “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 92

Remove a Rear Storage Drive

Note - Rear storage drives are supported in the twelve 3.5-inch storage drive and twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drive configurations only. Rear storage drives are not supported in the eight
2.5-inch storage drive configuration.

1. Prepare the system for the drive removal.

90 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Rear Storage Drive

Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

2. Identify the rear storage drive you want to remove.


For specific storage drive locations, see “Rear Panel Components and Cable
Connections” on page 20. For information on storage drive status indicators (LEDs), refer to
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35.

3. Type the operating system commands required to stop the server from using the
drive.
The exact commands required depend on the configuration of your drives. Unmount file
systems, or issue RAID commands as needed.

Note - The blue OK to Remove status indicator LED on the drive may or may not light, as
support for this varies depending on the operating system in use.

4. Remove the rear storage drive.

a. On the storage drive that you want to remove, push the drive release button
to open the latch [1].

b. Grasp the drive latch, and pull the drive out of the drive slot [2].

Caution - The drive latch is not an ejector. Do not open the latch too far to the right. Doing so
can damage the latch.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 91


Install a Rear Storage Drive

5. Consider your next steps:

■ If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 92.
■ If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 230.

Related Information

■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20


■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77

Install a Rear Storage Drive

Note - Rear storage drives are supported in the twelve 3.5-inch storage drive and twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drive configurations only. Rear storage drives are not supported in the eight
2.5-inch storage drive configuration.

1. If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.

2. Determine the drive slot location for the replacement drive.


If you removed an existing drive from a slot in the system, you must install the replacement
drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed. Drives are physically addressed
according to the slot in which they are installed. See “Rear Panel Components and Cable
Connections” on page 20 for boot drive locations.

92 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)

3. Slide the drive into the drive slot until it is fully seated.

4. Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.

5. Perform administrative procedures to reconfigure the drive.


The procedures that you perform at this point depend on how your data is configured. You
might need to partition the drive, create file systems, load data from backups, or have the drive
updated from a RAID configuration.

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 35
■ “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82

Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)

The fan modules are located in the front of the server. See the following procedures:

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 93


Remove a Fan Module

■ “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94


■ “Install a Fan Module” on page 97

Related Information

■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69

Remove a Fan Module

You do not have to power off the server to service fan modules.

You should not begin this procedure unless you have a replacement fan module and you are
ready to install it right away.

Caution - When removing and replacing a fan module in the Oracle Server X6-2L, you must
complete the entire procedure within 20 seconds to maintain adequate cooling within the
system. Remove and replace only one fan module at a time. Ensure that you have obtained the
replacement fan module and that is it is ready for installation before starting the replacement
procedure. Each fan module contains two fans, with two fan motors per fan. The four fan
motors provide separate tachometer signals so that the fan module reports four tach signals to
Oracle ILOM. Even if only one fan motor is faulted within the fan module, the Oracle ILOM
service processor detects that four fan motors have failed to spin while the fan module is
removed. If the fan module is not replaced within 20 seconds of removal, Oracle ILOM will
take the protective action to shut down the system to prevent thermal damage to the system.

1. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

2. To access the fan modules, open the top cover fan assembly door.

Caution - Close the top cover fan assembly door within 60 seconds to maintain adequate
airflow to properly cool the server. Leaving the door open for more than 60 seconds, while the
server is running, might cause the server to automatically shut down.

3. Identify the faulty fan module.

94 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Fan Module

Each fan module has a fan status indicator (LED) that is located next to the module. If the LED
is amber, the fan has failed. The location of the fan status LED is shown in the following figure.

LED Color and State Meaning


Amber – The fan module is faulty. The front Top Fan LED and the front and rear panel Service Required LEDs are
also lit if the system detects a fan module fault.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 95


Remove a Fan Module

4. Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screw that secures the
faulty fan module in the chassis [1].

5. Grasp both the captive screw and the opposite end of the module and lift the fan
module straight up and out of the chassis, and set it aside on an antistatic mat
[2].

Caution - When removing a fan module, do not rock it back and forth. Rocking the fan module
can cause damage to the motherboard connectors.

Caution - Do not service any other components in the fan compartment unless the system is
shut down and the power cords are removed.

6. Consider your next step:

■ If you removed the fan assembly as part of another procedure, return to that procedure.

96 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a Fan Module

■ Otherwise, continue to “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

Related Information

■ “Install a Fan Module” on page 97

Install a Fan Module

1. Remove the replacement fan module from its packaging, and place it on an
antistatic mat.

2. With the top cover fan assembly door open, install the replacement fan module
into the server [1].

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 97


Install a Fan Module

The fan modules are keyed to ensure that they are installed in the correct orientation.

3. Press down on the fan module and apply firm pressure to fully seat the fan
module.

4. Verify that the fan module status indicator (LED) on the replacement fan module
is not illuminated.

5. Using your thumb and forefinger, tighten the captive screw to secure the fan
module to the chassis. Then use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw
an additional 1/4 turn to secure the fan module to the chassis [2].

6. Close the top cover fan assembly door.

98 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)

7. Verify that the Top Fan Fault LED on the front of the server and the Service
Required LEDs on the front and rear of the server are extinguished.
See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33 for more information about identifying
and interpreting system status indicators.

8. Consider your next step:


■ If you installed the fan module as part of another procedure, return to that procedure.
■ Otherwise, return the server to operation. See “Returning the Server to
Operation” on page 229.

Related Information
■ “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94

Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)

The server's redundant power supplies support concurrent maintenance, which enables you to
remove and replace a power supply without shutting down the server, provided that the other
power supply is online and working.

The server supports model A258 (1000 watt) power supplies. The A258 power supply unit
(PSU) provides conversion from the AC lines to the system, accepting ranges from 100-240
volts AC (VAC). These PSUs are designed to be hot-swappable, and in most cases will provide
fully redundant “1+1” power, allowing the system to suffer the loss of a PSU or an AC feed
with no loss to system availability.

In maximally configured systems, it is possible that the worst-case power consumption of the
system could exceed the capacity of a single PSU. The PSUs provide an over-subscription
mode, which allows the system to operate with fault-tolerance even with modest excursions
beyond the rated capacity of a single PSU. This over-subscription support is accomplished
using hardware signaling between the PSU and motherboard circuitry, which can force the
system to throttle CPU and memory power in the event that a PSU is lost. The resulting power
savings will be enough to allow the system to continue to run (in a lower-performance state)
until the power problem is resolved.

The following status indicators (LEDs) are lit when a power supply fault is detected:
■ Front and rear Service Required LEDs
■ Amber Service Required LED on the faulty power supply
■ Rear Power Supply Fault LED located on the server front panel

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 99


Remove a Power Supply

If a power supply fails and you do not have a replacement available, leave the failed power
supply installed to ensure proper airflow in the server. For more information, refer to the
following topic and procedures:
■ “Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 35
■ “Remove a Power Supply” on page 100
■ “Install a Power Supply” on page 102

Related Information
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32
■ “Powering Down the Server” on page 59

Remove a Power Supply


1. Prepare the system for power supply removal.
Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

2. Identify which power supply requires replacement.

100 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Power Supply

Callout Description
1 Power supply 0
2 Power supply 1

A lit amber Service Required LED on a power supply indicates that a failure was detected.
You can also use the Oracle ILOM show faulty command at the Oracle ILOM command-line
prompt (->) to identify a power supply failure.
Alternatively, to list all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and issue
the fmadm faulty command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from the Oracle
ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm faulty command. For more information
about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and supported commands, see the
Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and Diagnostics Firmware Release 5.0.x in
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.
oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Note - The fans of a failed power supply might still be spinning when the system is powered on.
The fans will stop spinning when you disconnect the power cords.

3. Gain access to the rear of the server where the faulty power supply is located.

4. If the cable management arm (CMA) is installed, disconnect both CMA left-side
connectors and move the CMA out of the way.
For instructions for disconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, refer to “Remove the Cable
Management Arm” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

Caution - When disconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, be sure to use your arm to
support the CMA so that it does not hang down under its own weight and stress the right-side
connectors; otherwise, the CMA might be damaged. You must continue to support the CMA
until you have reconnected both of the left-side connectors.

5. Disconnect the power cord from the faulty power supply.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 101


Install a Power Supply

6. Grasp the power supply handle and push the power supply latch to the left [1].

7. Pull the power supply out of the chassis [2].

Caution - Whenever you remove a power supply, you should replace it with another power
supply; otherwise, the server might overheat due to improper airflow.

8. Continue to “Install a Power Supply” on page 102.

Related Information

■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20


■ “Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 35
■ “Install a Power Supply” on page 102

Install a Power Supply

Caution - Always replace the failed power supply with the same type model of power supply.

1. Remove the replacement power supply from its packaging, and place it on an
antistatic mat.

102 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a Power Supply

2. Align the replacement power supply with the empty power supply slot.

3. Slide the power supply into the slot until it is fully seated.
You will hear an audible click when the power supply fully seats.

4. Reconnect the power cord to the power supply.

5. Verify that the amber Service Required LED on the replaced power supply and
the Service Required LEDs are not lit on the front and rear panels.

Note - After you have replaced Power Supply 0, you might need to reset the Oracle ILOM
service processor (SP) to propagate the key identity properties (KIP) data to the new power
supply. For instructions on resetting the SP, see the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager
(ILOM) 5.0 Configuration and Maintenance Guide at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/
docs. Power Supply 1 does not contain KIP data, and therefore does not require an SP reset
after replacement.

6. If you disconnected the two CMA left-side connectors, reconnect the


connectors.

Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off 103


Install a Power Supply

For instructions for reconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, refer to “Install the Cable
Management Arm” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 35
■ “Remove a Power Supply” on page 100

104 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off

These sections describe how to service customer-replaceable units (CRUs) that require
you to power off the server. For more information about CRUs, see “Illustrated Parts
Breakdown” on page 22 and “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24.

Description Links
Service the DIMMs. “Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 105
Service the PCIe cards. “Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)” on page 120
Service the internal USB flash drives. “Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives
(CRU)” on page 128
Service the battery. “Servicing the Battery (CRU)” on page 131

Related Information
■ “Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off” on page 75
■ “Servicing FRUs” on page 135

Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

The Oracle Server X6-2L supports a variety of DDR4 DIMM configurations that can include
quad-rank (QR) and dual-rank (DR) DDR4 DIMMs.

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 56.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
DIMMs, or damage to the DIMMs might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 105


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

The following topics and procedures provide information to assist you when replacing a DIMM
or upgrading DIMMs:

■ “DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 106


■ “DIMM Population Scenarios” on page 107
■ “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108
■ “Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 108
■ “DIMM Operating Speeds” on page 112
■ “DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 112
■ “Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty
DIMMs” on page 113
■ “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 113
■ “Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 114
■ “Install a DIMM” on page 118

Related Information

■ “Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 136

DIMM and Processor Physical Layout

The physical layout of the DIMMs and processor(s) is shown in the following figure. When
viewing the server from the front, processor 0 (P0) is on the left. Notice that each processor, P0
and P1, have four memory channels that are labeled, from left to right, Ch C, Ch D, Ch B, and
Ch A.

106 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

FIGURE 3 DIMM and Processor Physical Layout

Note - In single-processor systems, the DIMM sockets associated with processor 1 (P1) are
nonfunctional and should not be populated with DIMMs.

Related Information
■ “DIMM Population Scenarios” on page 107
■ “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108
■ “Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 108
■ “DIMM Operating Speeds” on page 112
■ “DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 112
■ “Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty
DIMMs” on page 113

DIMM Population Scenarios


There are two scenarios in which you are required to populate DIMMs:

■ A DIMM fails and needs to be replaced.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 107


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

In this scenario, you can use the Fault Remind button to determine the failed DIMM, then
remove the failed DIMM and replace it. To ensure that system performance is maintained,
you must replace the failed DIMM with a DIMM of the same size (in gigabytes) and type
(quad-rank or dual-rank). In this scenario, you should not change the DIMM configuration.
■ You have purchased new DIMMs and you want to use them to upgrade the server's memory.
In this scenario, you should adhere to DIMM population rules and follow the recommended
DIMM population order for optimal system performance.

Related information
■ “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108
■ “Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 108
■ “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 113
■ “Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 114
■ “Install a DIMM” on page 118

DIMM Population Rules

The population rules for adding DIMMs to the server are as follows:
■ The server supports 64-GB quad-rank (QR) Load-Reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) and 32-
GB dual-rank (DR) and 16-GB DR Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs).
■ Do not mix 64-GB LRDIMMs and 16-GB or 32-GB RDIMMs in the same server. If the
server has 64-GB LRDIMMs installed, you cannot install 16-GB or 32-GB RDIMMs and
vice versa.
■ Within a memory channel, DIMMs must be populated in the black sockets first, then in the
black sockets with white tabs, and then in the white sockets.
■ If you are installing a mix of RDIMM sizes (for example, 16-GB and 32-GB), install the
larger size RDIMMs first, then the smaller RDIMMs, until all of the RDIMMs are installed.
■ The server will operate properly with a minimum of one DIMM installed per processor.

Populating DIMMs for Optimal System


Performance

Optimal performance is achieved by populating the DIMMs so that the memory is symmetrical,
or balanced. Symmetry is achieved by adhering to the following guidelines:

108 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

■ In single-processor systems, populate DIMMs of the same size in multiples of four.


■ In dual-processor systems, populate DIMMs of the same size in multiples of eight.
■ Populate the DIMM sockets in the order described in the following sections.

The following sections provide an example of how to populate the DIMM sockets to achieve
optimal system performance.

Note - Not all possible configurations are shown here.

■ “Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems for Optimal System


Performance” on page 109
■ “Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance” on page 111

Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems


for Optimal System Performance
In single-processor systems, install DIMMs only into DIMM sockets associated with processor
0 (P0). Starting with socket P0 D0, first filling the black sockets, then the black sockets with
white tabs, and then the white sockets, as shown in the following figure. Notice that the order
of populating the black sockets is Ch C first, Ch A second, Ch D third, and Ch B last. Repeat
the same population sequence for the black sockets with white tabs, and finally for the white
sockets.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 109


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

FIGURE 4 DIMM Population Order for Single-Processor Systems

The following table describes the proper order in which to populate DIMMs in a single-
processor system using the numbered callouts in the above figure, the memory channel labels
(Ch A through Ch D), and the DIMM socket labels (D0 through D11).

TABLE 8 DIMM Population Order for Single-Processor Systems


Population Order DIMMs Sockets for Processor 0 (P0) Memory Channels
Fill the black sockets first
First D0 Ch C
Second D11 Ch A
Third D3 Ch D
Fourth D8 Ch B
Then fill the black sockets with white tabs
Fifth D1 Ch C
Sixth D10 Ch A
Seventh D4 Ch D
Eighth D7 Ch B
Then fill the white sockets
Ninth D2 Ch C
Tenth D9 Ch A

110 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

Population Order DIMMs Sockets for Processor 0 (P0) Memory Channels


Eleventh D5 Ch D
Twelfth D6 Ch B

Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for


Optimal System Performance
In dual-processor systems, populate DIMMs into DIMM sockets starting with processor 0 (P0)
D0, then, alternating between sockets associated with processor 0 (P0) and matching sockets
for processor 1 (P1). Fill the black sockets, then the black sockets with white tabs, and finally,
the white sockets, as shown in the following figure. Notice that the order of populating the
black DIMM sockets is Ch C first, Ch A second, Ch D third, and Ch B last. Repeat the same
population sequence for the black sockets with white tabs, and finally, for the white sockets.

FIGURE 5 DIMM Population Order for Dual-Processor Systems

The following table describes the proper order in which to install DIMMs in a dual-processor
system using the numbered callouts in the above figure, the memory channel labels (Ch A
through Ch D), and the DIMM socket labels (D0 through D11).

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 111


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

TABLE 9 DIMM Population Order for Dual-Processor Systems

Population Order DIMM Sockets for Processor DIMM Sockets for Processor Memory Channels
0 (P0) 1 (P1)
Fill the black sockets first (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
First Fill D0 first Then fill D0 Ch C
Second Fill D11 first Then fill D11 Ch A
Third Fill D3 first Then fill D3 Ch D
Fourth Fill D8 first Then fill D8 Ch B
Then fill the black sockets with white tabs (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
Fifth Fill D1 first Then fill D1 Ch C
Sixth Fill D10 first Then fill D10 Ch A
Seventh Fill D4 first Then fill D4 Ch D
Eighth Fill D7 first Then fill D7 Ch B
Then fill the white sockets (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
Ninth Fill D2 first Then fill D2 Ch C
Tenth Fill D9 first Then fill D9 Ch A
Eleventh Fill D5 first Then fill D5 Ch D
Twelfth Fill D6 first Then fill D6 Ch B

DIMM Operating Speeds


The maximum supported memory speed is 2400 MT/s. However, not all system configurations
will support operation at this speed. The maximum attainable memory speed will be limited
by the maximum speed supported by the specific type of processor and the specific memory
population. All memory installed in the system will operate at the same speed, or frequency.

DIMM Rank Classification Labels

DIMMs come in a variety of ranks: dual or quad. Each DIMM is shipped with a label
identifying its rank classification. The following table identifies the label corresponding to each
DIMM rank classification:

TABLE 10 DIMM Rank Classification Labels

Rank Classification Label


Quad-rank LRDIMM 4Rx4

112 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)

Rank Classification Label


Dual-rank RDIMM 2Rx4

Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators


and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty DIMMs

When a single DIMM is marked as failed by Oracle ILOM (for example, fault.memory.
intel.dimm.training-failed is listed in the service processor Event Log), BIOS might
disable the entire memory channel that contains the failed DIMM, up to three DIMMs. As a
result, none of the memory installed in the disabled channel will be available to the operating
system. However, when the Fault Remind button is pressed, only the fault status indicator
(LED) associated with the failed DIMM lights. The fault LEDs for the other DIMMs in the
memory channel remain off. Therefore, you can correctly identify the failed DIMM using the lit
LED.

Using the Server Fault Remind Button

When the server Fault Remind button is pressed, an LED located next to the Fault Remind
button lights green to indicate that there is sufficient voltage present in the fault remind circuit
to light any fault LEDs that were lit due to a component failure. If this LED does not light when
you press the Fault Remind button, it is likely that the capacitor powering the fault remind
circuit has lost its charge. This can happen if the Fault Remind button is pressed for several
minutes with fault LEDs lit or if power has been removed from the server for more than 15
minutes.

The following figure shows the location of the Fault Remind button.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 113


Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM

FIGURE 6 Fault Remind Button Location

Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server, and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.

114 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM

See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to DIMMs.

2. Identify and note the location of the faulty DDR4 DIMM by pressing the Fault
Remind button on the motherboard I/O card.
See “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 113.
Faulty DIMMs are identified with a corresponding amber LED on the motherboard.

■ If the DIMM fault LED is off, then the DIMM is operating properly.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 115


Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM

■ If the DIMM fault LED is on (amber), then the DIMM is faulty and should be replaced [1].

3. To remove the faulty DIMM, do the following:

a. Rotate both DIMM socket ejectors outward as far as they will go.
The DIMM is partially ejected from the socket.

116 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM

b. Carefully lift the DIMM straight up to remove it from the socket.

4. Replace each faulty DIMM with either another DIMM of the same rank size (quad-
rank or dual-rank) or leave the socket empty.
For DIMM replacement instructions, see “Install a DIMM” on page 118.

Related Information

■ “DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 106


■ “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108
■ “Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 108
■ “DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 112
■ “Install a DIMM” on page 118

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 117


Install a DIMM

Install a DIMM

1. Unpack the replacement DDR4 DIMM and place it on an antistatic mat.

2. Ensure that the replacement DDR4 DIMM matches the size of the DIMM it is
replacing.
You must not replace a dual-rank DIMM with a quad-rank DIMM and vice versa. If you
violate this rule, the performance of the server might be adversely affected. For DIMM socket
population rules, see “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108.

3. Install a DIMM.

a. Ensure that the ejector tabs are in the open position.

b. Align the notch in the replacement DIMM with the connector key in the
connector socket.
The notch ensures that the DIMM is oriented correctly.

c. Push the DDR4 DIMM into the connector socket until the ejector tabs lock
the DIMM in place.

118 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a DIMM

If the DIMM does not easily seat into the connector socket, verify that the notch in the
DIMM is aligned with the connector key in the connector socket. If the notch is not
aligned, damage to the DIMM might occur.

4. Repeat Step 3 until all replacement DIMMs are installed.

5. Return the server to operation:

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

b. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

c. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 119


Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)

d. Reconnect the power cords and data cables to the server.


See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237.

e. Power on the server.


See “Power On the Server” on page 237.
Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

6. (Optional) Use Oracle ILOM to clear server DDR4 DIMM faults.


DDR4 DIMM faults are automatically cleared after a new DIMM has been installed. If you
need to manually clear DDR4 DIMM faults, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager
(ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Note - If you want to move a faulty DDR4 DIMM to a new DIMM socket or re-seat a DIMM
for troubleshooting, you must first manually clear the associated DIMM fault. Otherwise, the
DIMM fault might follow the DIMM to the new socket location or reoccur on the current socket
location, causing a false DIMM fault condition.

Related Information

■ “DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 106


■ “DIMM Population Rules” on page 108
■ “Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 108
■ “DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 112
■ “Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 114

Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)

These sections describe how to service and install PCIe cards. Refer to your PCIe card
documentation for complete software and cabling information about your card.

Caution - The procedures in this section should not be used to service the Oracle Storage 12
Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card that is located in PCIe slot 6 or the optional Oracle PCIe
NVMe switch card that is located in PCIe slot 3. The Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card and Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card are field replaceable units (FRUs) and should be
serviced only by qualified Oracle Service personnel.

120 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 68.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
PCIe cards. You must disconnect all power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.

Note - For a complete list of supported PCIe cards, refer to the Oracle Server X6-2L Product
Notes at https://www.oracle.com/goto/x6-2l/docs.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “PCIe Slot Locations” on page 121
■ “Remove a PCIe Card” on page 122
■ “Install a PCIe Card” on page 125

Related Information
■ “Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU)” on page 183

PCIe Slot Locations

There are six PCIe slots available for optional PCIe cards. The following figure shows the PCIe
slot numbering.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 121


Remove a PCIe Card

Call Out Description


1 PCIe slot 1 (PCIe slot 1 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
2 PCIe slot 2 (PCIe slot 2 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
3 PCIe slot 3 (PCIe slot 3 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems. Primary slot for the
optional Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card)
4 PCIe slot 4
5 PCIe slot 5
6 PCIe slot 6 (Primary slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card)

Note - All of the PCIe slots comply with the PCI Express 3.0 specification and can
accommodate 25 Watt PCIe3 cards.

Related Information

■ “Remove a PCIe Card” on page 122


■ “Install a PCIe Card” on page 125

Remove a PCIe Card

Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.

Note - Prior to replacing or installing a PCIe card, refer to the card documentation for specific
installation and cabling instructions.

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap.

122 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a PCIe Card

See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to PCIe cards.

2. Locate the PCIe card that you want to remove.


See “PCIe Slot Locations” on page 121.

3. If necessary, record where the PCIe cards are installed.

4. Unplug all data cables from the PCIe card [1].


Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 123


Remove a PCIe Card

5. Rotate the PCIe card locking mechanism [1], and then lift up on the PCIe card to
disengage it from the motherboard connectors [2].

6. Place the PCIe card on an antistatic mat.

Caution - If you are not immediately inserting a replacement PCIe card into the empty slot,
insert a PCIe filler panel in the slot to reduce the possibility of radiated electromagnetic
interference (EMI). For instructions for installing a PCIe filler panel, see “Remove and Install
Filler Panels” on page 230.

124 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a PCIe Card

Related Information

■ “PCIe Slot Locations” on page 121


■ “Install a PCIe Card” on page 125

Install a PCIe Card

Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.

1. Unpack the replacement PCIe card, and place it on an antistatic mat.

2. Locate the proper PCIe slot for the card you are replacing.

Note - PCIe slot 3 is the primary slot for the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card. This card is
required for controlling and managing the optional NVMe storage drives.

3. If necessary, remove the PCIe filler panel from the slot.

Note - Save this filler panel in case you need to remove the PCIe card from the system.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 125


Install a PCIe Card

4. Insert the PCIe card into the correct slot [1], and rotate the PCIe locking
mechanism to secure the PCIe card in place [2].

5. Reconnect the cables to the PCIe card that you unplugged during the removal
procedure [2].

6. Return the server to operation.

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

126 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a PCIe Card

b. Install the top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

c. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

d. Connect any required data cables to the PCIe card.


Route data cables through the cable management arm.

e. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the AC OK LED is lit.

7. Use Oracle ILOM to clear any server PCIe card faults.


If a PCIe card fault message in Oracle ILOM is not cleared under Open Problems, you
must manually clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. For instructions for manually clearing a
PCIe card fault, see the procedure "Clear Faults for Undetected Replaced or Repaired
Hardware Components" in the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 5.0.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0
Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

8. To determine whether additional steps are required to complete the installation


of the PCIe card, refer to the server product notes for the type of PCIe card you
installed.
For a complete listing of the PCIe host bus adapter (HBA) cards supported by the server, refer
to the Oracle Server X6-2L Product Notes at https://www.oracle.com/goto/x6-2l/docs.

Related Information

■ “PCIe Slot Locations” on page 121


■ “Remove a PCIe Card” on page 122

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 127


Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU)

Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU)

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive
to electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the component to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 68.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
flash drive or damage to the drive might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.

This section covers the following procedures:

■ “Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 128


■ “Install an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 129

Related Information
■ “USB Ports” on page 244

Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive

The server can be equipped with up to two internal USB Flash drives.

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

128 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install an Internal USB Flash Drive

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

2. To remove a USB flash drive, grasp the flash drive and pull it from the slot.

Related Information

■ “Install an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 129

Install an Internal USB Flash Drive

1. Unpack the replacement USB flash drive.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 129


Install an Internal USB Flash Drive

2. Insert the flash drive into the USB slot.

3. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

b. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

c. Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies and power on the
server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

130 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the Battery (CRU)

Related Information
■ “Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 128

Servicing the Battery (CRU)

The real-time clock (RTC) battery maintains system time when the server is powered off and
a time server is unavailable. If the server fails to maintain the proper time when the system is
powered off and not connected to a network, replace the battery.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
the battery. You must disconnect the power cables from the system before performing this
procedure.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “Remove the Battery” on page 131
■ “Install the Battery” on page 132

Remove the Battery


1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 131


Install the Battery

e. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the battery.

2. To dislodge the battery from its retainer, gently push the top edge of the battery
away from the retainer.

3. Lift the battery up and out of its retainer.

Related Information
■ “Install the Battery” on page 132

Install the Battery

1. Unpack the replacement battery.

132 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Battery

2. Press the new battery into the battery retainer with the negative side facing
inside the server chassis.

3. Return the server to operation.

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

b. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

c. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

d. Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies, and power on the
server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Note - If the service processor is configured to synchronize with a network time server using
the Network Time Protocol (NTP), the Oracle ILOM SP clock will be reset as soon as the
server is powered on and connected to the network; otherwise, proceed to the next step.

4. If the service processor is not configured to use NTP, you must do one of the
following:
■ Reset the Oracle ILOM SP clock using the Oracle ILOM CLI or the web interface.
For instructions, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0
Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.
■ Use the BIOS Setup Utility to reprogram the host clock.
For the BIOS Main menu that supports this procedure, refer to the Oracle X6 Series Servers
Administration Guide at https://www.oracle.com/goto/x86admindiag/docs.

Related Information
■ “Remove the Battery” on page 131

Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off 133


134 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
Servicing FRUs

The following sections describe how to service field-replaceable units (FRUs). You must power
down the system and remove the AC power cords before servicing all FRU components. For
more information about FRUs, see “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 22 and “Field-
Replaceable Units” on page 25.

Note - Only authorized Oracle service personnel should service FRUs.

Description Links
Service the processors. “Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 136
Service the front and rear storage drive backplanes. “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes
(FRU)” on page 150
Service SAS cables. “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171
Service NVMe cables. “Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 177
Service the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID “Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card and super capacitor. HBA Card (FRU)” on page 183
Service the DVD drive. “Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)” on page 190
Service the front indicator LED/USB modules. “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules
(FRU)” on page 196
Service the motherboard assembly. “Servicing the Motherboard Assembly
(FRU)” on page 212

Related Information

■ “Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off” on page 75


■ “Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off” on page 105

Servicing FRUs 135


Servicing Processors (FRU)

Servicing Processors (FRU)

Caution - Processors should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
processor. You must disconnect the power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.

Caution - This procedure requires that you handle components that are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge. This sensitivity can cause the component to fail. To avoid damage, ensure that
you follow electrostatic discharge safety measures and antistatic practices. See “Electrostatic
Discharge Safety” on page 56.

Caution - The green processor removal and replacement tool (part number G29477-002 or
later) must be used to remove and replace a processor; otherwise, the processor or the processor
socket might be damaged. Additionally, do not use a tool that is designed for earlier generations
of Intel processors (CPUs). If you use an earlier generation tool, the processor will only be
partially held by the tool and it could fall from the tool, which could damage the processor
socket.

Note - On single-processor systems, neither a heatsink nor a processor filler cover are installed
in the processor socket 1 (P1). To protect the delicate processor socket pins, the cover that
comes on the motherboard from manufacturing is left in place.

This section covers the following topics:

■ “Remove a Processor” on page 137


■ “Install a Processor” on page 144

Related Information

■ “Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 105

136 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Processor

Remove a Processor

Caution - Processor removal and replacement must be done using the green removal and
replacement tool (part number G29477-002 or later) that is included with the replacement
processor for the server. Using a different tool might result in damage to the processor and
processor socket. Additionally, the removal and replacement tool ships with replacement
motherboards.

Caution - Be careful not to touch the processor socket pins. The processor socket pins are
very fragile. A light touch can bend the processor socket pins beyond repair. Always use the
processor removal and replacement tool to remove and replace the processor.

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

c. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the
processors.

2. Identify the location of the faulty processor by pressing the Fault Remind button
on the motherboard I/O card.

Servicing FRUs 137


Remove a Processor

Note - When the Fault Remind button is pressed, an LED located next to the Fault Remind
button lights green to indicate that there is sufficient voltage present in the fault remind circuit
to light any fault LEDs that were lit due to a failure. If this LED fails to light when you press
the Fault Remind button, it is likely that the capacitor powering the fault remind circuit has
lost its charge. This can happen if the Fault Remind button is pressed for a long time with fault
LEDs lit or if power has been removed from the server for more than 15 minutes.

The processor fault LED for the faulty processor lights. The processor fault LEDs are located
next to the processors:

■ If the processor fault LED is off, then the processor is operating properly.
■ If the processor fault LED is on (amber), then the processor is faulty and should be replaced.

138 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Processor

Callout Description
1 Fault Remind button
2 Fault Remind LED
3 Processor 0 fault LED
4 Processor 1 fault LED

3. Gently press down on the top of the heatsink to counteract the pressure of the
captive spring-loaded screws that secure the heatsink to the motherboard and
loosen the four Phillips captive screws in the heatsink using a No. 2 Phillips
screwdriver [2].

Servicing FRUs 139


Remove a Processor

Turn the screws counterclockwise alternately one and one-half turns until they are fully
released.

4. To separate the heatsink from the top of the processor, gently twist the heatsink
left and right, while pulling upward, and then lift off the heatsink and place it
upside down on a flat surface.
A thin layer of thermal grease separates the heatsink and the processor. This grease acts as an
adhesive.

140 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Processor

Note - Do not allow the thermal grease to contaminate the work space or other components.

5. Use an alcohol pad to clean the thermal grease from the underside of the
heatsink.
Be careful not to get the thermal grease on your fingers.

Caution - Failure to clean the heatsink prior to removing the processor could result in the
accidental contamination of the processor socket or other components. Also, be careful not to
get the grease on your fingers, as this could result in contamination of components.

6. Disengage the processor release lever on the right side of the processor socket
(viewing the server from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it
to the side away from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [3].

7. Disengage the processor release lever on the left side of the processor socket
(viewing the server from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it
to the side away from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [3].

8. To lift the ILM assembly load plate off of the processor socket, rotate the
processor release lever on the right side of the processor toward the closed
position (the ILM assembly load plate is lifted up as the release lever is lowered
toward the closed position) and carefully swing the ILM load plate to the fully
open position [4].

Caution - Whenever you remove a processor, you should replace it with another processor and
reinstall the processor heatsink; otherwise, the server might overheat due to improper airflow.
For instructions for installing a processor, see “Install a Processor” on page 144.

9. To remove the processor from the processor socket, acquire the processor
removal and replacement tool and perform the following steps.

a. Locate the button in the center of the top of the processor removal tool and
press it to the down position [1].

b. Properly position the tool over the processor socket and lower it into place
over the processor socket [2].
To properly position the tool over the processor socket, rotate the tool until the green
triangle on the side of the tool is facing the front of the server and it is over the left side of
the processor socket when viewing the server from the front.

Servicing FRUs 141


Remove a Processor

c. Press the release lever on the processor tool to release the center button
and engage the processor [3].
An audible click indicates that the processor is engaged.

d. Grasp the tool by the sides and remove it from the server [4].

e. Turn the tool upside down and verify that it contains the processor [5].

f. While holding the processor tool upside down, press the center button on
the tool to release the processor [5].

g. Carefully grasp the processor by the front and back edges, lift it out of the
tool and place it with the circuit side down (the installed orientation) into an
antistatic container [6].

142 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove a Processor

h. Carefully clean the thermal grease off the top of the processor.

Related Information

■ “Install a Processor” on page 144

Servicing FRUs 143


Install a Processor

Install a Processor

Caution - Processor removal and replacement must be done using the green removal and
replacement tool (part number G29477-002 or later) that is included with the replacement
processor for the server. Using a different tool might result in damage to the processor and
processor socket. Additionally, the removal and replacement tool ships with replacement
motherboards.

Caution - Be careful not to touch the processor socket pins. The processor socket pins are
very fragile. A light touch can bend the processor socket pins beyond repair. Always use the
processor removal and replacement tool to remove and replace the processor.

1. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

2. Unpack the replacement processor, and place it on an antistatic mat.

3. Ensure that the replacement processor is identical to the failed processor that
was removed.
For a description of the processors that are supported by the server, refer to “Server
Components” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

4. Ensure that the two processor ILM assembly levers and the ILM assembly load
plate are in the fully open position.
For instructions for opening the processor ILM assembly levers and the load plate, see Step 6
through Step 8 of “Remove a Processor” on page 137.

5. To install the replacement processor into the processor removal and


replacement tool, acquire the tool and perform the following steps.

a. Press the button in the center of the tool to the down position [1].

b. Turn the tool upside down, grasp the processor by its front and back edges
and position the processor (circuit side up) in the tool so that the triangle
on the corner of the processor aligns with the triangle on the side of the
processor removal and replacement tool [2].

c. Lower the processor into the tool and press the tool release lever to release
the center button and engage the processor [3].

144 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a Processor

An audible click indicates that the processor is locked into place.

d. Properly position the tool over the processor socket and lower it into place
[4].
To properly position the tool in the processor socket, rotate the tool until the green triangle
on the side of the tool is facing the front of the server and it is over the left side of the
processor socket (when viewing the server from the front) and lower the tool into the
processor socket.

e. Press the center button on the tool down to release the processor so that it
is installed in the socket [5].

Servicing FRUs 145


Install a Processor

f. Remove the processor removal and replacement tool [6].

6. Visually check the alignment of the processor in the socket [1].


When properly aligned, the processor sits flat in the processor socket.

146 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a Processor

Caution - Do not press down on the processor. Irreparable damage to the processor or
motherboard might occur from excessive downward pressure. Do not forcibly seat the processor
into the socket. Excessive downward pressure might damage the socket pins.

7. Swing the processor ILM assembly load plate into the closed position [2].
Ensure that the load plate sits flat around the periphery of the processor.

Servicing FRUs 147


Install a Processor

8. Engage the socket release lever on the left side of the socket (viewing the server
from the front) by rotating it downward and slipping it under the catch [3].

9. Engage the socket release lever on the right side of the socket (viewing the
server from the front) by rotating it downward and slipping it under the catch [3].

10. Use the syringe (supplied with the new or replacement processor) to apply
approximately 0.1 mL of thermal grease to the center of the top of the processor.
To measure 0.1 ml of thermal grease, use the graduated scale on the thermal grease syringe.

Note - Do not distribute the grease; the pressure of the heatsink will do it for you when you
install the heatsink.

11. Inspect the heatsink for dust and lint.


Clean the heatsink if necessary.

12. Orient the heatsink so that the screws line up with the mounting posts [4].

Note - The processor heatsink is not symmetrical.

13. Carefully position the heatsink on the processor, aligning it with the mounting
posts to reduce movement after it makes initial contact with the layer of thermal
grease [4].

Caution - Avoid moving the heatsink after it has contacted the top of the processor. Too much
movement could disturb the layer of thermal grease, causing voids, and leading to ineffective
heat dissipation and component damage.

14. Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws alternately one-half turns
until fully seated [4].

15. Return the server to operation.

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

b. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

c. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

148 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install a Processor

d. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

16. Use Oracle ILOM to clear server processor faults.


Refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at
https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs for more information about the following steps.

a. To show server faults, log in to the server as root using the Oracle ILOM CLI,
and type the following command to list all known faults on the server:
-> show /SP/faultmgmt
The server lists all known faults, for example:

-> show /SP/faultmgmt


Targets:
shell
0 (/SYS/MB/P0)
Properties:
Commands:
cd
show

Alternatively, to list all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and
issue the fmadm faulty command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from
the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm faulty command. For
more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and
supported commands, see the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 5.0.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM)
5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

b. To clear the fault identified in Step 16a, type the following command:
-> set /SYS/MB/P0 clear_fault_action=true
For example:

-> set /SYS/MB/P0 clear_fault_action=true


Are you sure you want to clear /SYS/MB/P0 (y/n)? y
Set ‘clear_fault_action’ to ‘true’

Alternatively, to clear all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and
issue the fmadm repair command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from

Servicing FRUs 149


Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)

the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm repair command. For
more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and
supported commands, see the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 5.0.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM)
5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Related Information
■ “Remove a Processor” on page 137

Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes


(FRU)

Caution - Front and rear storage drive backplanes should be removed and replaced only by
authorized Oracle Service personnel.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
the storage drive backplane. You must disconnect the power cables before performing this
procedure.

To remove and install the front and rear storage drive backplanes, follow these procedures:

■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 151
■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 154
■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 156
■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 160
■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 162
■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 165
■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 167
■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 169

Related Information
■ “Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 75
■ “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171
■ “Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 177

150 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems

Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-


Drive Systems

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

c. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

d. Remove the disk cage cover.


See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

e. If necessary, remove the fan modules from the server.


See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

2. Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply
pull them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the
storage drives from the server, record their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.

3. Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.

a. Disconnect the two SAS cables from the storage drive backplane to the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [1].

Servicing FRUs 151


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems

Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.

b. Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane [2].

c. If present, disconnect the two optional NVMe cables from the storage drive
backplane [2].

152 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems

d. If the server has a DVD drive, disconnect the power and DVD data
connections from the storage drive backplane [3].
See “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 191.

e. Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the storage drive backplane [4]

4. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the right-side spring-mounted screw


that secures the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].

5. Lift up on the left-side spring tab, and then gently release the storage drive
backplane from the standoff hooks and out from under the spring tab [5].

6. Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and spring tab
and out of the chassis [6].

7. Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.

Related Information

■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 154

Servicing FRUs 153


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems

Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive


Systems

1. Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and then position it under the
left-side spring tab to engage the standoff hooks. [1 and 2].

154 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the right-side spring-
mounted screw to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [3].

3. Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.

a. Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the storage drive backplane [3].

Note - Cable part number 7064127 is required to connect the auxiliary signal to the storage
drive backplane.

b. If the server has a DVD drive, reconnect the power and DVD data
connections to the storage drive backplane [4].
See “Install the DVD Drive” on page 193.

Note - Cable part number 7064128 is required to connect DVD power and data to the storage
drive backplane.

c. Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane [5].

Note - Cable part number 7064125 is required to connect power to the storage drive backplane.

d. If present, reconnect the two optional NVMe cables to the storage drive
backplane [5].
To ensure proper NVMe cable connections, see “Install NVMe Cables” on page 181.

e. Reconnect the two SAS cables to the storage drive backplane from the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [6].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 174.

4. Return the server to operation.

a. If removed, install the fan modules.


See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

b. Install the disk cage cover, and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

c. Install all storage drives into the storage cage.

Servicing FRUs 155


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82.

d. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

e. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 57.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 151

Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-


Drive Systems

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

156 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

d. Open the server fan assembly door, and remove the fan modules from the
server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

e. Remove the fan assembly door from the server.


See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

2. Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.

3. Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.

a. Disconnect the SAS cable from the storage drive backplane to the rear-
mounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables from the storage drive
backplane to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [1].

Servicing FRUs 157


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.

b. Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the storage drive backplane [2].

c. Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane [3].

4. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the right-side spring-mounted screw


that secures the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].

158 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

5. Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the standoff hooks and out
of the chassis [5].

6. Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.

Related Information

■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 160

Servicing FRUs 159


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-


Drive Systems

1. Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
standoff hooks [1].

160 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the right-side spring-
mounted screw to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [2].

3. Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.

a. Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane [3].

Note - Cable part number 7086654 is required to connect power to the storage drive backplane.

b. Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the storage drive backplane [4].

Note - Cable part number 7079291 is required to connect the auxiliary signal to the storage
drive backplane.

c. Reconnect the SAS cable to the storage drive backplane from the rear-
mounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables to the storage drive
backplane from the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [5].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 174.

4. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the fan assembly door top cover.


See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

b. Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

c. Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.


See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82.

d. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

e. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Servicing FRUs 161


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems

Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 57.

Related Information
■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 156

Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-


Four Drive Systems

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

d. Open the server fan assembly door, and remove the fan modules from the
server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

e. Remove the fan assembly door from the server.


See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

2. Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage it from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 77.

162 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems

Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.

3. Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.

a. Disconnect the two power cables and the auxiliary signal cable from the
storage drive backplane [1].

b. If present, disconnect the two optional NVMe cables from the storage drive
backplane [2].

Servicing FRUs 163


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems

c. Disconnect the SAS cable from the storage drive backplane to the rear-
mounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables from the storage drive
backplane to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [3].
Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.

4. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two spring-mounted screws that
secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].

5. Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the standoff hooks [4].

6. Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and out of the
chassis.

7. Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.

Related Information

■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 165

164 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems

Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-


Four Drive Systems

1. Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
standoff hooks [1].

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the two spring-mounted
screws to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [1].

3. Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.

a. Reconnect the SAS cable to the storage drive backplane from the rear-
mounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables to the storage drive
backplane from the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [2].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 174.

Servicing FRUs 165


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems

b. If present, reconnect the two optional NVMe cables to the storage drive
backplane [3].
To ensure proper NVMe cable connections, see “Install NVMe Cables” on page 181.

c. Reconnect the two power cables and the auxiliary signal cable to the
storage drive backplane [4].
Use the following cable part number table to ensure proper cable connections.

Cable Part Number Description


7079291 Auxiliary signal cable
7064125 Power cable, right
7086654 Power cable, center

4. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the fan assembly door top cover.


See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

b. Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

c. Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.


See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 82.

d. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

e. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 57.

166 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives

Related Information
■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 162

Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-


Mounted Storage Drives
1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the storage
drive backplane.

2. Pull each rear-mounted storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the
disk backplane.
See “Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 90.

Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.

3. Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane [1].

a. Disconnect the two SAS cables from the storage drive backplane.

Servicing FRUs 167


Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives

b. Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane.

4. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws that secure the storage
drive backplane to the storage drive cage [2].

5. Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the two standoff hooks [3].

6. Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and out of the
chassis [4].

7. Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.

168 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives

Related Information
■ “Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 169

Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-


Mounted Storage Drives
1. Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
two standoff hooks [1 and 2].

Servicing FRUs 169


Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the two screws to secure
the storage drive backplane to the storage drive cage [3].

3. Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane [4].

a. Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane.

Note - Cable part number 530-4037-01 is required to connect power to the rear storage drive
backplane.

b. Reconnect the two SAS cables to the storage drive backplane.


To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 174.

4. Return the server to operation.

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

b. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

c. Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.


See “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 92.

d. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

e. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 167

170 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)

Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)

Caution - SAS cables should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.

Caution - The system supplies power to the cables even when the server is powered off.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the server, you must disconnect power cords before
servicing the cables.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171
■ “Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 174

Related Information
■ “Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 75
■ “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150
■ “Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 177

Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables


1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.

Servicing FRUs 171


Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables

See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Open the server fan assembly door and remove fan modules.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

f. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the SAS
storage drive cables.

g. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the


following:

■ If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives or


twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, remove the server's front fan assembly
door cover.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove


the server's disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

2. Disconnect the SAS cables.

a. (Optional) To disconnect the SAS cables between the rear storage drive
backplane and front storage drive backplane, press each latch, and then pull
out to disengage the cable from each SAS connector [1].

b. To disconnect the SAS cables between the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS
PCIe RAID HBA card in PCIe slot 6 and the front storage drive backplane,
press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each SAS
connector [1 and 2].
See also “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
Card” on page 184.

172 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables

Note - The following figure shows SAS cables being removed from the twenty-four
drive system configuration. If you are removing SAS cables from an eight-drive system
configuration, your front disk backplane SAS connector locations will be different. In addition,
the chassis mid-wall is removed in the illustration to clearly show the SAS cable connections.

3. Remove the SAS cables from the server.

Servicing FRUs 173


Install SAS Storage Drive Cables

Note - (Optional) SAS cable connectors do not fit through the right-side chassis mid-wall.
If you are removing SAS cables between the rear storage drive backplane and front storage
drive backplane, you first must remove the chassis mid-wall. For instructions, see Step 11 in
“Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 212.

Carefully remove the SAS cable bundles from the chassis mid-wall. Be careful not to snag the
cables on the server components.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184
■ “Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 174

Install SAS Storage Drive Cables

1. Install SAS storage drive cables.

a. Install the SAS cables between the front storage drive backplane and the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card in PCIe slot 6 [1].
Route the SAS cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and along the left side of the
chassis. To ensure that the SAS cable bundle does not interfere with the air baffle, install
the SAS cable bundle under the super capacitor cable for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS
PCIe RAID HBA card along the left side of the chassis.

174 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install SAS Storage Drive Cables

Note - The following figure shows SAS cables being installed in the twenty-four drive system
configuration. If you are installing SAS cables in an eight-drive system configuration, your
front disk backplane SAS connector locations will be different. In addition, the chassis mid-wall
is removed in the illustration to clearly show the SAS cable connections.

b. (Optional) Install the cables between the front storage drive backplane and
the rear storage drive backplane [2].

Servicing FRUs 175


Install SAS Storage Drive Cables

Note - SAS cable connectors do not fit through the right-side chassis mid-wall. If you are
installing SAS cables between the rear storage drive backplane and front storage drive
backplane, you first must remove the chassis mid-wall. For instructions, see Step 3 in “Install
the Motherboard Assembly” on page 222.

Route the SAS cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and along the right side of the
chassis.

2. Reconnect the SAS cables.

a. To reconnect the SAS cables between the front storage drive backplane and
the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card, plug each cable into
its SAS connector until you hear an audible click [1].
See also “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 187.
Use the following table to ensure proper SAS cable connections:

System Disk Configuration Disk Backplane Ports HBA Port Cable Part Number
Eight storage drives Shorter length cable for J5A1 7076125
drives 0-3
Eight storage drives Longer length cable for J5A1 7076125
drives 4-7
Twelve storage drives J302 (Upper) J5A1 7091185
Twelve storage drives J301 (Lower) J5A1 7091185
Twenty-four storage drives J3202 (Upper) J5A1 7091185
Twenty-four storage drives J3201 (Lower) J5A1 7091185

b. (Optional) To reconnect the SAS cables between the front storage drive
backplane and the rear storage drive backplane, plug each cable into its
SAS connector until you hear an audible click [2].
In twelve and twenty-four drive systems, attach the SAS cable to connector (J300) on the
front storage drive backplane and to SAS connectors (RHDD0 and RHDD1) on the rear
storage drive backplane.

Note - Cable part number 7064129 is required for SAS connections between the front storage
drive backplane and rear storage drive backplane.

3. Return the server to operation.

176 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)

a. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the


following:

■ If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives or


twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, install the server's front fan assembly
door cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server's disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

b. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

c. Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

d. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

e. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

f. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information
■ “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 187
■ “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171

Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)

Caution - NVMe cables should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.

Servicing FRUs 177


Remove NVMe Cables

Caution - The system supplies power to the cables even when the server is powered off.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the server, you must disconnect power cords before
servicing the cables.

This section covers the following procedures:

■ “Remove NVMe Cables” on page 178


■ “Install NVMe Cables” on page 181

Related Information
■ “Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 75
■ “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150
■ “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171

Remove NVMe Cables


1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

e. Open the server fan assembly door and remove the fan modules.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

178 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove NVMe Cables

f. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the NVMe
cables.

g. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the


following:

■ If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,


remove the server's front fan assembly door cover.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove


the server's disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

2. Disconnect the NVMe cables from the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in slot 3 [1].
Press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each connector. See also
“Remove a PCIe Card” on page 122.

Servicing FRUs 179


Remove NVMe Cables

Note - The following figure shows NVMe cables being removed from the twenty-four
drive system configuration. If you are removing NVMe cables from an eight-drive system
configuration, your front disk backplane NVMe connector locations will be different.

3. Disconnect the NVMe cables from the front storage drive backplane [2].
Press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each connector.

4. Remove the NVMe cables from the server.


Carefully remove the NVMe cable bundle from the chassis mid-wall. Be careful not to snag the
cables on the server components.

Related Information

■ “Install NVMe Cables” on page 181

180 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install NVMe Cables

Install NVMe Cables


1. Install the NVMe cables between the front storage drive backplane and the
Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in PCIe slot 3.
Route the NVMe cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and via the cable trough between
the fan modules and processors.

2. Reconnect the NVMe cables to the front storage drive backplane [1].
Plug each cable into its connector until you hear an audible click.

Note - The following figure shows NVMe cables being installed in the twenty-four drive
system configuration. If you are installing NVMe cables in an eight-drive system configuration,
your front disk backplane NVMe connector locations will be different.

3. Reconnect the NVMe cables to the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in slot 3 [2].

Servicing FRUs 181


Install NVMe Cables

Plug each cable into its connector until you hear an audible click. See also “Install a PCIe
Card” on page 125.
Use the following table to ensure proper NVMe cable connections.

Note - Each NVMe cable contains a matching label that corresponds to the port on the Oracle
PCIe NVMe switch card. For example, the NVMe cable labeled 0,1 plugs into Oracle PCIe
NVMe switch card port 0,1, and the cable labeled 2,3 plugs into Oracle PCIe NVMe switch
card port 2,3.

System Disk Disk Backplane Oracle PCIe NVMe Cable Part


Configuration Cable Connector Switch Card Port Number
Cable Connector
Eight storage drive A 2,3 7089783
Eight storage drive B 0,1 7089783
Twenty-four storage drives A 2,3 7089784
Twenty-four storage drives B 0,1 7089784

4. Return the server to operation.

a. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the


following:

■ If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,


install the server's front fan assembly door cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server's disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

b. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

c. Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

d. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

182 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU)

e. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

f. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information
■ “Remove NVMe Cables” on page 178

Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA


Card (FRU)

These sections describe how to service and install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card.

Caution - The Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card should be removed and
replaced only by authorized Oracle Service personnel.

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 68.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
PCIe cards. You must disconnect all power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184
■ “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 187

Related Information
■ “Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 171

Servicing FRUs 183


Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe


RAID HBA Card

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server to the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap.


See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

2. Remove the super capacitor from the chassis.

a. Grasp both ends of the cable connector, press in on the release latch, and
then unplug the connector [1].
The HBA super capacitor is secured to the air baffle by a recloseable fastener, which
allows it to be easily removed and replaced.

b. To separate the HBA super capacitor from the air baffle, place your finger
under the rear of the super capacitor and lift up [2].

184 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

Place the super capacitor on an antistatic mat.

3. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the super
capacitor cable and the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card.

Servicing FRUs 185


Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

4. Rotate the PCIe card locking mechanism, and then lift up on the PCIe HBA card
to disengage it from the motherboard connectors [1].

5. Disconnect the super capacitor cable and the SAS cables from the Oracle
Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card [1].
See also “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171.

6. Lift and remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and super
capacitor cable from the chassis [2].

7. Place the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and super capacitor
cable on an antistatic mat.

186 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

Related Information

■ “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 187

Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID


HBA Card

1. Unpack the replacement Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and
super capacitor, and place them on an antistatic mat.

2. Swivel the air baffle into the upright position and install the super capacitor
cable along the left sidewall of the chassis.
Install the super capacitor cable on top of the SAS cable bundle along the left sidewall of the
chassis. Otherwise, the SAS cable bundle will interfere with the air baffle.

3. Connect the super capacitor cable to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA, and then reconnect the SAS cables that you unplugged during the removal
procedure [1].

Servicing FRUs 187


Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 174.

4. Insert the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card into PCIe slot 6, and
rotate the PCIe locking mechanism to secure the PCIe HBA card in place [2].

Note - PCIe slot 6 is the primary slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
card. The card is required for controlling and managing the SAS storage drives.

5. Install the super capacitor in the chassis.

a. Lower the air baffle to the installed position.

188 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card

b. Apply a recloseable fastener to the underside of the super capacitor.

c. Align the recloseable fastener on the super capacitor with the recloseable
fastener on the air baffle and press down [1].

d. Connect the super capacitor's cable [2].

Servicing FRUs 189


Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)

6. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

b. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

c. Connect any required data cables to the PCIe card.


Route data cables through the cable management arm.

d. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

7. Use Oracle ILOM to clear any server PCIe card faults.


You can use the Oracle ILOM web interface or the command-line interface (CLI) to manually
clear faults. For information on how to use the Oracle ILOM web interface or the CLI to clear
server faults, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation
Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184

Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)


The DVD drive is available only on eight-drive systems. The DVD drive is accessible from the
chassis front panel and by removing the disk cage cover.

Caution - The DVD drive should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 68.

190 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the DVD Drive

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing the
DVD drive or damage to the drive might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.

This section covers the following procedures:

■ “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 191


■ “Install the DVD Drive” on page 193

Related Information

■ “Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 93

Remove the DVD Drive

1. Remove media from the drive.

2. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap.


See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 56.

d. Remove the disk cage cover.


See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

3. If necessary, remove fan modules 2 and 3 from the chassis.


See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

Servicing FRUs 191


Remove the DVD Drive

4. Reach into the server directly behind the DVD drive, and disconnect the power
and DVD data connectors from rear of the DVD drive.

5. Lift up on the release tab on the rear of the DVD drive to disengage the drive
from chassis.

192 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the DVD Drive

6. Gently push the DVD forward and out of the front of the chassis.

7. Standing in front of the chassis, grasp the DVD drive with both hands, and
continue to pull the DVD drive from the chassis until it clears the front of the
server.

8. Place the DVD drive on an antistatic mat.

Related Information

■ “Install the DVD Drive” on page 193

Install the DVD Drive

1. Gently push the replacement DVD drive into the chassis [1].

Servicing FRUs 193


Install the DVD Drive

2. Continue to push the DVD drive into the chassis until the release tab on the rear
of the drive engages the chassis with an audible click.

3. Reach into the server directly behind the DVD drive, and reconnect the power
and DVD data connectors to the rear of the DVD drive.

194 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the DVD Drive

Note - Cable part number 7064128 is required to connect power and DVD data to the front
storage drive backplane.

4. If removed, reinstall fan modules 2 and 3 in the chassis.


See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

5. Install the disk cage cover, and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

6. Return the server to operation.

a. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

Servicing FRUs 195


Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)

b. Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies, and power on the
server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information
■ “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 191

Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)

Caution - The front LED/USB indicator modules should be removed and replaced only by
authorized Oracle Service personnel.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
front LED/USB indicator module. You must disconnect the power cables before performing this
procedure.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “Remove the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 196
■ “Install the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 200
■ “Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 204
■ “Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 208

Related Information
■ “Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 32

Remove the Left LED Indicator Module


1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.

196 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Left LED Indicator Module

See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

2. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:

■ If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-


four 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.

a. Remove the server fan assembly door.


See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

b. Remove the four remaining No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of
the chassis) that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.

Servicing FRUs 197


Remove the Left LED Indicator Module

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove the
server disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

3. Remove the fan modules from the server.


See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

4. Disconnect all cables from the front storage drive backplane.


See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

5. Disconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable from the motherboard [1 and 2].

198 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Left LED Indicator Module

6. Slide the disk cage assembly forward, and then gently lift the disk cage
assembly from the chassis [3].
Set the disk cage assembly on an anti-static mat.

7. Remove the left LED indicator module.

a. Remove the two No. 2 Phillips screws that secure the LED indicator module
to the server front panel [1].
If present, remove the capping tape that secures the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.

Servicing FRUs 199


Install the Left LED Indicator Module

b. Remove the LED indicator module from the server front panel [2].

Related Information

■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33


■ “Install the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 200

Install the Left LED Indicator Module

1. Install the left LED indicator module.

a. Push the LED indicator module and cable through the left LED housing on
the server front panel [1].
If necessary, use a piece of capping tape to secure the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.

200 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Left LED Indicator Module

Note - Cable part number 7064122 is required for the left LED indicator module.

b. Insert and tighten the two No. 2 Phillips screws to secure the LED indicator
module to the server front panel [2].

2. Gently lift the disk cage assembly and set it into the server chassis [1].

Servicing FRUs 201


Install the Left LED Indicator Module

Slightly push the disk cage assembly into the server chassis to ensure that the disk cage screw
holes are correctly aligned with the server chassis.

3. Reconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable to the motherboard [2 and 3].

4. Reconnect all cables to the front storage drive backplane.


See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

5. Install the fan modules in the server.


See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

6. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:

202 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Left LED Indicator Module

■ If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-


four 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.

a. Install the four No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of the chassis)
that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.

b. Install the server fan assembly door.


See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

7. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

b. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

c. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.

Servicing FRUs 203


Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information

■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33


■ “Remove the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 196

Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

2. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:

■ If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-


four 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.

a. Remove the server fan assembly door.


See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70.

204 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

b. Remove the four remaining No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of
the chassis) that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove the
server disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72.

3. Remove the fan modules from the server.


See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.

4. Disconnect all cables from the front storage drive backplane.


See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

Servicing FRUs 205


Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

5. Disconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable from the motherboard [1 and 2].

6. Slide the disk cage assembly forward, and then gently lift the disk cage
assembly from the chassis [3].
Set the disk cage assembly on an anti-static mat.

7. Remove the right LED/USB indicator module.

a. Remove the two No. 2 Phillips screws that secure the LED/USB indicator
module to the server front panel [1].

206 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

If present, remove the capping tape that secures the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.

b. Remove the LED/USB indicator module from the server front panel [2].

Related Information

■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33


■ “Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 208

Servicing FRUs 207


Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

1. Install the right LED/USB indicator module.

a. Push the LED/USB indicator module and cable through the right LED
housing on the server front panel [1].
If necessary, use a piece of capping tape to secure the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.

208 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

Note - Cable part number 7064124 is required for the right LED/USB indicator module.

b. Insert and tighten the two No. 2 Phillips screws to secure the LED/USB
indicator module to the server front panel [2].

2. Gently lift the disk cage assembly and set it into the server chassis [1].

Servicing FRUs 209


Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

Slightly push the disk cage assembly into the server chassis to ensure that the disk cage screw
holes are correctly aligned with the server chassis.

3. Reconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable to the motherboard [2 and 3].

4. Reconnect all cables to the front storage drive backplane.


See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

5. Install the fan modules in the server.


See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

6. Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:

210 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module

■ If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-


four 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.

a. Install the four No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of the chassis)
that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.

b. Install the server front fan assembly door.


See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

■ If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

7. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the server top cover.


See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

b. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

c. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.

Servicing FRUs 211


Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)

See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Related Information
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 204

Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)

Caution - The motherboard assembly should be removed and replaced only by authorized
Oracle Service personnel.

Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing the
motherboard. You must disconnect the power cables before performing these procedures.

Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This discharge can cause server components to fail. To avoid damage,
ensure that you follow the antistatic practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 56.

This section covers the following procedures:


■ “Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 212
■ “Install the Motherboard Assembly” on page 222

Related Information
■ “About System Components” on page 21

Remove the Motherboard Assembly


1. Prepare the server for service.

a. Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.

212 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

See “Powering Down the Server” on page 59.

b. Extend the server into the maintenance position.


See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 66.

c. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area of the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

d. Remove the server top cover.


See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69.

2. Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and its associated
super capacitor.
See “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184.

3. Remove the air baffle.


Remove the air baffle by lifting the baffle up and out of the server.

4. Remove the following reusable components:

Caution - During the motherboard removal procedure, it is important to label power supplies
with the slot numbers from which they were removed (PS0, PS1). This is required because the
power supplies must be reinstalled into the slots from which they were removed; otherwise, the
server key identity properties (KIP) data might be lost. When a server requires service, the KIP
is used by Oracle to verify that the warranty on the server has not expired. For more information
on KIP, see “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update” on page 57.

■ Fan modules
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 94.
■ SAS storage drive cables
See “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171.
■ NVMe cables (if present)
See “Remove NVMe Cables” on page 178.
■ PCIe cards
See “Remove a PCIe Card” on page 122.
■ Power supplies
See “Remove a Power Supply” on page 100.

Servicing FRUs 213


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

5. If the server has a DVD drive, disconnect the DVD drive cable from the
motherboard SATA connector.
To remove the DVD drive cable, carefully guide it through the chassis mid-wall and place it on
top of the disk cage so that it is away from the motherboard. You do not need to disconnect the
DVD drive cable from the DVD drive.
See “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 191.

6. Disconnect the power cable from the motherboard to the rear storage drive
backplane [1].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

7. Disconnect the ribbon cables from the left front LED indicator module and right
front LED/USB indicator module [1].

214 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

See “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)” on page 196.

8. Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the motherboard to the front storage
drive backplane [2].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

9. Disconnect the power cable from the motherboard to the front storage drive
backplane [2].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

Servicing FRUs 215


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

10. Disconnect the signal cable from the server intrusion switch [2].

11. Remove the mid-wall from the chassis.

a. Using a hex/flat head screwdriver, remove the screw on each side of the
chassis that secures the mid-wall to the chassis [3].

b. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the four green captive screws that
secure the chassis mid-wall to the bottom of the chassis [4].

216 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

c. Lift the mid-wall out of the chassis [5].

12. With the server in the extended maintenance position, remove the motherboard
from the server with all reusable components that populate the motherboard in
place.

a. Carefully slide the motherboard forward, and lift it out of the chassis [6].

b. Place the motherboard assembly on an antistatic mat, and next to the


replacement motherboard.

Servicing FRUs 217


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

13. Remove the following reusable components from the motherboard and install
them onto the replacement motherboard.

■ DDR4 DIMMs
See “Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 114 and “Install a
DIMM” on page 118.

Note - Install the DDR4 DIMMs only in the slots (connectors) from which they were
removed. Performing a one-to-one replacement of DIMMs significantly reduces the
possibility that DIMMs will be installed in the wrong slots. If you do not reinstall the
DIMMs in the same slots, server performance might be reduced and some DIMMs might
not be used.

■ USB flash drives


See “Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 128 and “Install an Internal USB Flash
Drive” on page 129.

14. Remove the processors from the failed motherboard.


See “Remove a Processor” on page 137.

15. Remove the processor socket covers from the replacement motherboard and
install the processors.

a. Disengage the processor Independent Loading Mechanism (ILM) assembly


hinge lever on the right side of the processor socket (viewing the server

218 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it to the side away
from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [1].

b. Disengage the processor ILM assembly load lever on the left side of the
processor socket (viewing the server from the front) by pushing down
on the lever and moving it to the side away from the processor, and then
rotating the lever upward [1].

c. To lift the processor ILM assembly load plate off of the processor socket,
rotate the ILM assembly hinge lever on the right side of the processor
toward the closed position (the load plate is lifted up as the hinge lever is
lowered) and carefully swing the load plate to the fully open position [2].

d. Grasp the top and underside of the processor socket cover with one hand
(place your thumb against the underside of the cover), place your other

Servicing FRUs 219


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

thumb against the underside of the cover, and carefully push the cover out
of the processor ILM assembly load plate [3].

Caution - Be careful not to allow the processor socket cover to fall into the processor socket as
this could result in damage to the socket.

e. Install a processor into the socket from which you removed the processor
socket cover.
See “Install a Processor” on page 144.

f. Repeat Step 15a through Step 15e to remove the second processor socket
cover from the replacement motherboard and install the second processor.

16. Install the processor socket covers on the faulty motherboard.

Caution - The processor socket covers must be installed on the faulty motherboard; otherwise,
damage might result to the processor sockets during handling and shipping.

Caution - Be careful not to allow the processor socket cover to fall into the processor socket as
this could result in damage to the socket.

220 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Remove the Motherboard Assembly

a. Open one of the processor ILM assemblies on the faulty motherboard [1 and
2].

Servicing FRUs 221


Install the Motherboard Assembly

b. Hold the processor ILM assembly load plate open with one hand and
position the processor socket cover over the top of the pressure frame so
that 1) the arrow on the processor socket cover is aligned with the arrow on
the load plate and 2) the fasteners on one side of the cover (the fasteners
are located on the underside of the cover) are inside the load plate (it does
not matter which side), and use your thumb to press the other side of the
processor socket cover into the load plate. [3].

c. Close the processor ILM assembly load plate [4 and 5].

d. Repeat Step 16a through Step 16c to install the second processor socket
cover on the faulty motherboard.

Related Information

■ “About System Components” on page 21


■ “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24
■ “Field-Replaceable Units” on page 25
■ “Install the Motherboard Assembly” on page 222

Install the Motherboard Assembly

1. Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68.

2. Carefully lift and place the motherboard assembly into the chassis [1].

222 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Motherboard Assembly

Tilt the motherboard to the right side to fit under the power supply assembly, level the
motherboard and place it into the server chassis, then slide it to the rear of the server to engage
the raised standoffs.

3. Install the mid-wall into the chassis.

a. Lift and place the mid-wall into the chassis [2].

Servicing FRUs 223


Install the Motherboard Assembly

b. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four green captive screws that
secure the mid-wall to the bottom of the chassis [3].

c. Using a hex/flat head screwdriver, insert and tighten the screw on each side
of the chassis to secure the mid-wall in the chassis [4].

4. Reconnect the power cable to the motherboard from the rear storage drive
backplane [5].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

224 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Motherboard Assembly

5. Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the motherboard from the front storage
drive backplane [5].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

6. Reconnect the ribbon cables from left and right LED/USB indicator modules to
the motherboard [6].
See “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)” on page 196.

7. Reconnect the power cable to the motherboard from the front storage drive
backplane [6].

Servicing FRUs 225


Install the Motherboard Assembly

See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 150.

8. Reconnect the server intrusion switch cable to the motherboard [6].

9. If the server has a DVD drive, reconnect the DVD drive cable.
To reconnect the DVD drive cable, carefully guide it through the chassis mid-wall and
reconnect it to the motherboard SATA connector.
See “Install the DVD Drive” on page 193.

10. Reinstall the following components:

Caution - When reinstalling power supplies, it is important to reinstall them into the slots from
which they were removed during the motherboard removal procedure; otherwise, the server key
identity properties (KIP) data might be lost. When a server requires service, the KIP is used by
Oracle to verify that the warranty on the server has not expired. For more information on KIP,
see “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update” on page 57.

■ Power supplies
See “Install a Power Supply” on page 102.
■ PCIe cards
See “Install a PCIe Card” on page 125.
■ NVMe cables (if present)
See “Install NVMe Cables” on page 181.
■ SAS storage drive cables
See “Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 174.
■ Fan modules
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 97.

11. Install the air baffle.


Install the air baffle by placing it into the server. Leave the air baffle in an upright position in
preparation for installing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card.

12. Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and its associated
super capacitor.
See “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 187.

13. Return the server to operation.

a. Install the server top cover.

226 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Motherboard Assembly

See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230.

b. Return the server to the normal rack position.


See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235.

c. Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237 and “Power On the
Server” on page 237. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.

Note - IMPORTANT: After replacing the motherboard, you might need to manually program
the product serial number (PSN) into the new motherboard. This is necessary because
the motherboard is a secondary member of a select group (or quorum) of components for
maintaining the PSN for service entitlement, and if you replace more than one of the quorum
members during any given service procedure, a secondary quorum member might need to be
programmed with the PSN.

Related Information
■ “About System Components” on page 21
■ “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 24
■ “Field-Replaceable Units” on page 25
■ “Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 212

Servicing FRUs 227


228 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
Returning the Server to Operation

After replacing components inside of the server, perform the procedures in the following
sections.

Description Links
Note server filler panel requirements. “Server Filler Panel Requirements” on page 229
Install the server top cover. “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230
Install the fan door assembly top cover. “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232
Install the disk cage cover. “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233
Remove any antistatic measures. “Remove Antistatic Measures” on page 234
Reinstall the server chassis in the rack. “Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 234
Return the server to the normal rack position. “Return the Server to the Normal Rack
Position” on page 235
Reconnect power and data cables. “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237
Power on the server. “Power On the Server” on page 237

Related Information
■ “Preparing for Service” on page 55

Server Filler Panel Requirements


The server might be shipped with module-replacement filler panels for storage drives and PCIe
cards. These filler panels are installed at the factory and must remain in the server until you
replace them with a purchased option.

Before you can install an optional server component into the server, you must remove the filler
panel from the location into which you intend to install the component. When you remove
a storage drive or a PCIe card from the server, you must install either a replacement for the
component removed or a filler panel.

Returning the Server to Operation 229


Remove and Install Filler Panels

Related Information
■ “Preparing for Service” on page 55

Remove and Install Filler Panels


See the procedures in the following table to remove and install filler panels for
storage drives and PCIe cards.

Filler Panel Type Removal Procedure Installation Procedure


Storage drive 1. Locate the storage drive filler panel to be 1. Locate the vacant storage drive module
removed from the server. slot in the server, and then ensure that the
2. To unlatch the storage drive filler panel, release lever on the filler panel is fully
pull the release lever, and then tilt the lever opened.
out into a fully opened position. 2. Slide the filler panel into the vacant slot
3. To remove the filler panel from the slot, by pressing the middle of the filler panel
hold the opened release lever, and gently faceplate with your thumb or finger.
slide the filler panel toward you. The release lever will go in as it makes
contact with the chassis. Do not slide the
filler panel in all the way. Leave the filler
panel out approximately 0.25 to 0.50 inch
(6 to 12 mm) from the opening.
3. Using your thumb or finger, press on the
middle of the filler panel faceplate until the
release lever engages with the chassis.
4. Close the release lever until it clicks into
place and is flush with the front of the
server.
PCIe slot 1. Remove the server top cover. 1. Remove the server top cover.
2. To remove the PCIe slot filler panel, rotate 2. To install the PCIe slot filler panel, press
the PCIe locking mechanism, and then the PCIe filler panel into the vacant PCIe
lift and remove the PCIe slot filler panel slot, and then rotate the PCIe locking
from the location into which you intend to mechanism to secure the PCIe slot filler
install the PCIe card. panel.

Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional


in single-processor systems.

Install the Server Top Cover


1. Place the top cover on the chassis.
Set the cover down so that it hangs over the rear of the server by about 1 inch (25 mm) and the
side latches align with the cutouts in the chassis.

230 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Server Top Cover

2. Check both sides of the chassis to ensure that the top cover is fully down and
flush with the chassis.
If the cover is not fully down and flush with the chassis, slide the cover towards the rear of the
chassis to position the cover in the correct position.

Caution - If the top cover is not correctly positioned before you attempt to latch the cover, the
internal latch that is located on the underside of the cover might be damaged.

3. Gently slide the cover toward the front of the chassis until it latches into place
(with an audible click).
As you slide the cover toward the front of the server, watch the green release button. You will
hear an audible click when the green release button pops up, indicating that the cover is locked.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69

Returning the Server to Operation 231


Install the Fan Assembly Door

Install the Fan Assembly Door

Note - The procedures in this section should be used for systems configured with twelve 3.5-
inch storage drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives. If your system is configured with
eight 2.5-inch drives, see “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 233.

1. Place the fan assembly door on the chassis and slightly over the fan assembly.

2. Slide the fan assembly door forward and under the lip of the forward top cover
until it latches into place [1].

3. Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to install and secure the fan assembly door [2].

■ If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, install and
tighten the two screws on each side of the chassis and the three screws on
top of the chassis.

■ If your system is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives, install


and tighten the two screws on each side of the chassis.

Related Information
■ “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 70
■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69

232 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Install the Disk Cage Cover

Install the Disk Cage Cover

Note - The procedures in this section should be used for systems configured with eight 2.5-inch
storage drives. If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drives, see “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 232.

1. Place the disk cage cover on the chassis [1].

Returning the Server to Operation 233


Remove Antistatic Measures

2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the twelve screws (three on
each top side of the chassis, and three on each side of the chassis) to secure the
disk cage cover [2].

Related Information
■ “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 69
■ “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 230
■ “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 72

Remove Antistatic Measures


1. Remove any antistatic straps or conductors from the server chassis.

2. Remove the antistatic wrist strap from yourself.

Related Information
■ “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 68

Reinstall the Server in the Rack

After servicing the system, reinstall it into the rack.

Caution - Deploy any rack anti-tilt mechanism before installing the server into the rack.

Caution - The server weighs approximately 63 pounds (28.5 kg). Two people are required to
carry the chassis and install it in the rack.

1. Lift the server from the antistatic mat, and reinstall the server into the rack.
Refer to “Installing the Server Into a Rack” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide for the
installation instructions specific to your rackmount kit.

2. If the cable management arm (CMA) is not installed, that is, you removed it
because you removed the server completely out of the rack, install the CMA.
For installation instructions for the CMA, refer to “Install the Cable Management Arm” in
Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

234 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position

3. If the cables are disconnected from the rear of the server, that is, you
disconnected the cables because you removed the server completely out of the
rack, reconnect the cables.

■ For instructions on reconnecting cables to the rear of the server, see


“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237.

■ For detailed information on connecting cables to the rear of the server, refer
to “Rear Cable Connections and Ports” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation
Guide.

Related Information

■ “Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 67


■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position


If the server is in the extended maintenance position, use this procedure to return the server to
the normal rack position.

1. Push the server back into the rack, as described in the following steps.

a. Simultaneously pull and hold the two green release tabs (one on each side
of the slide rails on the server) toward the front of the server while you push
the server into the rack.
As you push the server into the rack, verify that the cable management arm (CMA) retracts
without binding.

Returning the Server to Operation 235


Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position

Note - To pull the green release tab, place your finger in the center of the tab, not on the end,
and apply pressure as you pull the tab toward the front of the server.

b. Continue pushing the server into the rack until the slide-rail locks (on the
front of the server) engage the slide-rail assemblies.
You will hear an audible click when the server is in the normal rack position.

2. If the CMA is not installed, that is, you removed it because you removed the
server completely out of the rack, install the CMA.
For installation instructions for the CMA, refer to “Install the Cable Management Arm” in
Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

3. If the cables are disconnected from the rear of the server, that is, you
disconnected the cables because you extended the server out of the rack,
reconnect the cables.

■ For instructions on reconnecting cables to the rear of the server, see “Reconnect Power and
Data Cables” on page 237.

236 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Reconnect Power and Data Cables

■ For detailed information on connecting cables to the rear of the server, refer to “Rear Cable
Connections and Ports” in Oracle Server X6-2L Installation Guide.

Related Information
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Reconnect Power and Data Cables


1. Reconnect the data cables to the rear of the server, as appropriate.
If the cable management arm (CMA) is in the way, extend the server approximately 13 cm (5
inches) out of the front of the rack.

2. Reconnect the power cables to the power supplies.

3. If necessary, reinstall the cables into the cable management arm and secure
them with Velcro straps.

4. Power on the server.


See “Power On the Server” on page 237.

Related Information
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 234
■ “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 235
■ “Power On the Server” on page 237

Power On the Server

As soon as the power cords are connected, standby power is applied. In standby power mode,
the Power/OK LED on the server front panel blinks steadily. Depending on the configuration of
the firmware, the system might boot. If it does not boot, follow this procedure.

Power on the server by performing one of the following actions:


■ Press the Power button on the front bezel.
■ Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Power On from the Select Action list.

Returning the Server to Operation 237


Power On the Server

■ Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI), and type the following command
at the Oracle ILOM prompt:

-> start /System

When the server is powered on and the power-on self-test (POST) code checkpoint tests
have completed, the green Power/OK status indicator (LED) on the front panel of the server
lights and remains lit.

Related Information
■ “Powering Down the Server” on page 59
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

238 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Identifying the Server Ports

These sections describe the pinouts of the server connectors.

Description Links
Review the Gigabit Ethernet ports. “Gigabit Ethernet Ports” on page 239
Review the network management ports. “Network Management Port” on page 240
Review the serial management ports. “Serial Management Port” on page 241
Review the video connectors. “Video Connector” on page 243
Review the USB ports. “USB Ports” on page 244

Related Information

■ “About the Oracle Server X6-2L” on page 15

Gigabit Ethernet Ports

The server has four auto-negotiating 100/1000/10GBASE-T Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) system
domain ports. All four Ethernet ports use a standard RJ-45 connector. The transfer rates are
shown in the following table.

Note - Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.

TABLE 11 Ethernet Port Transfer Rates

Connection Type IEEE Terminology Transfer Rate


Fast Ethernet 100BASE-T 100 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T 1,000 Mbps
10 Gigabit Ethernet 10GBASE-T 10,000 Mbps

Identifying the Server Ports 239


Network Management Port

The following figure and table describe the 10-GbE port pin signals.

TABLE 12 10-GbE Port Signals


Signal Description Pin Signal Description
Pin
1 Transmit/Receive Data 0 + 5 Transmit/Receive Data 2 –
2 Transmit/Receive Data 0 – 6 Transmit/Receive Data 1 –
3 Transmit/Receive Data 1 + 7 Transmit/Receive Data 3 +
4 Transmit/Receive Data 2 + 8 Transmit/Receive Data 3 –

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Network Management Port

The server has one auto-negotiating 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet management domain


interface, labeled NET MGT. For information about configuring this port for managing the
server with Oracle ILOM, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0
Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

240 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Serial Management Port

TABLE 13 Network Management Port Signals


Signal Description Pin Signal Description
Pin
1 Transmit Data + 5 Common Mode Termination
2 Transmit Data – 6 Receive Data –
3 Receive Data + 7 Common Mode Termination
4 Common Mode Termination 8 Common Mode Termination

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 33
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Serial Management Port

The serial management connector (labeled SER MGT) is an RJ-45 connector that can be
accessed from the rear panel. This port is the default connection to the server. Use this port only
for server management.

TABLE 14 Default Serial Connections for Serial Port


Parameter Setting
Connector SER MGT
Rate 9600 baud
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Data bits 8

The following figure and table describe the SER MGT port pin signals.

Identifying the Server Ports 241


Serial Management Port

TABLE 15 Serial Management Port Signals

Signal Description Pin Signal Description


Pin
1 Request to Send 5 Ground
2 Data Terminal Ready 6 Receive Data
3 Transmit Data 7 Data Set Ready
4 Ground 8 Clear to Send

If you need to connect to the SER MGT port using a cable with either a DB-9 or a DB-25
connector, follow the pin descriptions in the tables to create a crossover adapter appropriate for
your serial connection.

TABLE 16 RJ-45 to DB-9 Adapter Crossovers Wiring Reference

DB-9 Adapter
Serial Port (RJ-45 Connector)

Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description


1 RTS 8 CTS
2 DTR 6 DSR
3 TXD 2 RXD
4 Signal ground 5 Signal ground
5 Signal ground 5 Signal ground
6 RXD 3 TXD
7 DSR 4 DTR
8 CTS 7 RTS

TABLE 17 RJ-45 to DB-25 Adapter Crossovers Wiring Reference

Serial Port (RJ-45 Connector) DB-25 Adapter

Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description


1 RTS 5 CTS
2 DTR 6 DSR
3 TXD 3 RXD
4 Signal ground 7 Signal ground
5 Signal ground 7 Signal ground
6 RXD 2 TXD
7 DSR 20 DTR
8 CTS 4 RTS

242 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Video Connector

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

Video Connector

The video connector is a DB-15 connector that can be accessed from the back panel.

TABLE 18 Video Connector Signals


Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
1 Red Video 9 [KEY]
2 Green Video 10 Sync Ground
3 Blue Video 11 Monitor ID - Bit 1
4 Monitor ID - Bit 2 12 Monitor ID - Bit 0
5 Ground 13 Horizontal Sync
6 Red Ground 14 Vertical Sync
7 Green Ground 15 N/C (Reserved)
8 Blue Ground

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65

Identifying the Server Ports 243


USB Ports

■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

USB Ports

The server has six USB ports for attaching supported USB 2.0–compliant devices. Two USB
ports are on the rear panel, two USB ports are on the front panel, and two USB ports are located
on the motherboard.

TABLE 19 USB Port Signals


Signal Description
Pin
1 +5 V
2 DAT-
3 DAT+
4 Ground

Related Information
■ “Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 20
■ “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 65
■ “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 237

244 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters

This section provides an overview of BIOS configuration management, Legacy BIOS, UEFI
BIOS, and the BIOS Setup Utility.

Description Links
Learn about the tools available to manage the BIOS “Managing the BIOS Configuration” on page 245
configuration.
Learn how to access the BIOS Setup Utility. “Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility” on page 246
Learn about UEFI BIOS. “Using UEFI” on page 250
Learn how BIOS allocates Option ROM and I/O “Using BIOS for Resource Allocation” on page 253
resources.
Learn how to perform common BIOS setup “Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks” on page 254
procedures.

Related Information

■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275

Managing the BIOS Configuration


The BIOS configuration parameters on an Oracle x86 server are manageable from the BIOS
Setup Utility and Oracle ILOM. For information about using these tools to manage the BIOS
configuration, refer to:

■ Oracle ILOM – “Maintaining x86 BIOS Configuration Parameters” in the Oracle ILOM
Administrator's Guide for Configuration and Maintenance Firmware Release 5.0.x in the
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.
oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.
■ BIOS Setup Utility – “Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks” on page 254

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 245


Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility

Related Information

■ Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at: https://
www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs

Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility


The BIOS Setup Utility provides five main menus that you can use to view product information,
and to configure, enable, and disable, or manage system components.

This section provides the following information:

■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246


■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247
■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247
■ “Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 249

BIOS Setup Utility Menus

The following table provides descriptions for the top-level BIOS Setup Utility menus.

TABLE 20 BIOS Setup Utility Menus Summary

Menu Description
Main General product information, including memory, time/date, security settings, system serial
number, and CPU and DIMM information.
Advanced Configuration information for the CPU, trusted computing, USB, and other information. Set
the IP address for the server SP.
Note - When operating in UEFI Boot Mode, Runtime UEFI driver configuration settings let
you manage PCIe drivers for all configurable devices.
Boot Set the boot mode to Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS, and configure the boot device priority.
IO Manage configuration settings for I/O devices, such as I/O virtualization settings, and enable
and disable Option ROMs.
Save & Exit Save changes and exit, discard changes and exit, discard changes, or restore the default BIOS
settings.

See “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275 for examples of each of these screens.

246 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus

Related Information
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275
■ “Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 249

BIOS Key Mappings

When viewing the BIOS output from a terminal using the serial console redirection feature,
some terminals do not support function keys. BIOS supports the mapping of function keys
to Control key sequences when serial redirection is enabled. The following table provides a
description of the function key to Control key sequence mappings.

TABLE 21 Function Key to Control Key Sequence Mapping


Function Key Control Key BIOS POST Function BIOS Setup Function
Sequence
F1 Ctrl+Q Not applicable Activate the Setup Utility Help menu.
F2 Ctrl+E Enter BIOS Setup Utility while the Not applicable
system is performing the power-on self-
test (POST).
F7 Ctrl+D Not applicable Discard changes. (Not applicable to
UEFI Driver Control menu)
F8 Ctrl+P Activate the BIOS Boot Menu. Not applicable
F10 Ctrl+S Not applicable Activate Save and Exit pop-up menu.
(Not applicable to UEFI Driver Control
menu)
F12 Ctrl+N Activate Network boot. Not applicable

Related Information
■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247
■ “Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 249

Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus

You can access the BIOS Setup Utility screens from the following interfaces:
■ Use a USB keyboard and VGA monitor connected directly to the server. (A mouse is not
required to access the BIOS Setup Utility.)

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 247


Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus

■ Use a terminal (or terminal emulator connected to a computer) through the serial port on the
back panel of the server.
■ Connect to the server using the Oracle ILOM Remote System Console Plus application.

1. Reset or power on the server.


For example, to reset the server:

■ From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
■ From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
■ From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System

The power-on self-test (POST) sequence begins.

2. To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the F2 key (Ctrl+E from a serial connection)
when prompted and while the BIOS is running the power-on self-tests (POST).
The BIOS Setup Utility Main Menu screen appears.

248 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus

Related Information
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246
■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275

Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus

To navigate the menus or options listed on a menu, use the arrow keys. The currently selected
option or sub-menu is highlighted. For further instructions on how to navigate and change
settings in the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to the online information provided on the menu.

1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility.


See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. Use the left and right arrow keys to select the different primary menu options.
As you select each menu option, the top-level screen for that menu option appears.

3. To navigate options presented on a top-level screen, use the up and down arrow
keys.
Only options that can be modified are highlighted when you press the up and down arrow keys.

■ If an option can be modified, as you select the option, user instructions for
modifying the option appear in the right column of the screen.

■ If an option is a link to a sub-screen, a description of the sub-menu content


appears in the right column.

4. Modify an option by pressing the + or - keys (plus or minus keys) or by pressing


Enter and selecting the desired option from the pop-up menus.

5. Press the Esc key to return from a sub-menu screen to the previous menu
screen.
Pressing Esc from a top-level menu is equivalent to selecting the Discard Changes and Exit
option from the Save & Exit Menu.

6. Modify parameters as needed.

7. Press the F10 key to save your changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 249


Using UEFI

Alternatively, you can select the Save & Exit Menu, and then select the Save Changes and
Reset to save your changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Note - After modifying any BIOS settings and selecting Save Changes and Reset from the
Save & Exit Menu, the subsequent reboot might take longer than a typical reboot where no
settings were modified. The additional delay is required to ensure that changes to the BIOS
settings are synchronized with Oracle ILOM.

Related Information
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246
■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275

Using UEFI

The BIOS firmware controls the system from power-on until an operating system is booted.

The Oracle Server X6-2L contains a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)-compatible
BIOS that can be configured to support either UEFI or Legacy BIOS modes. The BIOS can be
configured to support either UEFI or Legacy BIOS modes. Legacy BIOS is the default mode,
and should be used with software and adapters that do not have UEFI drivers

This section includes the following information:


■ “Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 250
■ “Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes” on page 251
■ “UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 252
■ “Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 252

Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode

You can select either Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI Boot Mode. Legacy BIOS Boot Mode
is the default.

If you change BIOS boot modes, the boot candidates from the previously selected mode are
no longer available from the Boot Options Priority List in the BIOS Setup Utility. The boot
candidates from the new mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List only after you select

250 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Using UEFI

Save Changes and Reset from the BIOS Setup Utility menu. Use the Oracle ILOM BIOS
Backup and Restore function to preserve the BIOS configuration in case you want to switch
back to the previously selected mode. For information, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

All supported operating systems can use either UEFI Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot Mode.
However, once you choose a boot mode and install an operating system, if you reboot the server
and select a different boot mode, the installed image can only be used in the mode in which
it was installed. For instructions for selecting either UEFI Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot
Mode, see “Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode” on page 256.

Choose Legacy BIOS Boot Mode to allow host bus adapters (HBAs) to use option ROMs, and
when software or adapters do not have UEFI drivers. In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, only boot
candidates that support Legacy BIOS Boot Mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List in the
BIOS Setup Utility.

Choose UEFI Boot Mode when software and adapters use UEFI drivers. You can manually
select UEFI Boot Mode during system setup. In UEFI Boot Mode, only boot candidates that
support UEFI Boot Mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List in the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information
■ “Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes” on page 251
■ “UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 252
■ “Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 252

Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot


Modes

When switching between Legacy BIOS Boot Mode and UEFI BIOS Boot Mode (either
direction), BIOS settings that affect the Boot Options Priority list settings will be changed. If
the boot mode is changed, the boot candidates from the previous boot mode disappear. The boot
candidates for the newly changed boot mode appear after you save your changes and reset the
host and in the next boot to the BIOS Setup Utility.

Because the settings for a given mode do not persist after a transition between modes,
you should use the BIOS Backup and Restore feature to capture and preserve the BIOS
configuration if you intend to switch back to the previous boot mode and want to retain your
previous BIOS settings. For information about the BIOS Backup and Restore feature, refer to
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.
oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 251


Using UEFI

Related Information
■ “Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 250
■ “UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 252
■ “Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 252

UEFI Boot Mode Advantages

When the option is available to choose between a Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI BIOS
Boot Mode operating system installation, the advantages to choosing a UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
installation include the following:
■ Avoids Legacy Option ROM address constraints. For more information, see “Legacy Option
ROM Allocation” on page 253.
■ Supports operating system boot partitions greater than 2 terabytes (2 TB) in size. For more
information about limitations for supported operating systems, refer to the Oracle Server
X6-2L Product Notes at https://www.oracle.com/goto/x6-2l/docs.
■ Integrates PCIe device configuration utilities within the BIOS Setup Utility menus. For
more information, see “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” on page 275.
■ Displays bootable operating system images in the boot list as labeled entities, for example,
you will see a Windows boot manager label as opposed to raw device labels.

Related Information
■ “Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 250
■ “Select the Boot Device” on page 257

Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards

The method for interacting with configuration utilities for add-in cards and (system resident) I/
O adapters differs depending on whether Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
is used.

In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, I/O adapter utilities are invoked during BIOS POST progression
using hot keys identified by the adapter Option ROM during POST. When the hot key is
pressed, the adapter specific configuration utility interface is presented. Often the interface will
have a vendor-specific design.

252 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Using BIOS for Resource Allocation

In UEFI BIOS Boot Mode, the configuration screens for the add-in cards will appear as menu
items in the BIOS Advanced Menu as part of the standard BIOS Setup Utility screens. For
example, if the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID host bus adapter is installed in the
server, the configuration utility for the HBA appears as a menu selection under the iSCSI menu
option on the BIOS Advanced Menu.

Related Information
■ “Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 250

Using BIOS for Resource Allocation


This section explains how the BIOS allocates Option ROM and I/O resources.
■ “Legacy Option ROM Allocation” on page 253

Legacy Option ROM Allocation

In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, there are PC architecture constraints on Legacy Option ROM
allocation. These constraints do not apply to UEFI Option ROMs, which are often referred to as
UEFI drivers.

Choose Legacy BIOS Boot Mode to allow host bus adapters (HBAs) to use Option ROMs.
Choose UEFI BIOS Boot Mode to use UEFI drivers.

The system BIOS allocates 128 KB of address space for Legacy Option ROMs. This address
space is shared between on-board devices and PCIe add-in cards. This fixed address space
limitation is imposed by the PC architecture and not by the BIOS itself. It is possible to exhaust
the available address space when installing PCIe add-in cards. When the address space is
exhausted, Oracle ILOM displays an Option ROM Space Exhausted message, which means
that one or more devices cannot load Option ROMs.

For example, if you install a SAS PCIe card, you might encounter a message similar to the
following message in the Oracle ILOM event log:

Option ROM Space Exhausted - Device XXX Disabled

By default, all on-board Legacy Options ROMs are enabled in the BIOS. However, you can
disable most of these Option ROMs, unless they are required to support booting from the

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 253


Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks

associated device or to provide some other boot-time function. For example, it is not necessary
to load the Option ROM for the on-board network ports unless you want to boot from one or
more network ports (even then, you can disable the Options ROMs for the remaining ports).

To minimize server boot time and reduce the likelihood of exhausting the available Option
ROM address space, disable the Option ROMs for all devices that you do not intend to boot
from. Enable Option ROMs only for those devices from which you intend to boot. If Option
ROMs are enabled for more than one boot device, you might encounter an Option ROM space
exhausted condition. If you encounter the Option ROM space exhausted condition even after
disabling all devices from which you do not intend to boot, then disable additional Option
ROMs. Under some circumstances it might be necessary to disable Option ROMs for all
devices except for the primary boot device.

Related Information
■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247
■ “Configure Option ROM Settings” on page 265

Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks


This section presents the procedures for some of the BIOS setup tasks that you will typically
perform when setting up and managing the server.
■ “Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings” on page 254
■ “Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode” on page 256
■ “Select the Boot Device” on page 257
■ “Configure TPM Support” on page 259
■ “Configure SP Network Settings” on page 262
■ “Configure Option ROM Settings” on page 265
■ “Configure I/O Resource Allocation” on page 269
■ “Exit BIOS Setup Utility” on page 272

Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings

In the BIOS Setup Utility, you return the BIOS settings to the optimal factory default values, as
well as view and edit settings as needed. Any changes that you make in the BIOS Setup Utility
(using the F2 key) persist until the next time you change the settings.

254 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings

Before you begin, ensure that the following requirements are met:

■ A hard disk drive or solid state drive is properly installed in the server.
■ A console connection is established to the server.

1. Reset or power on the server.

■ From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
■ From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
■ From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System

The server resets.

2. When prompted, press the F2 key to access the BIOS Setup Utility.

3. To ensure that the factory defaults are set, do the following:

a. Press the F9 key to automatically load the optimal factory default settings.
A message appears prompting you to continue this operation by selecting OK or to cancel
the operation by selecting Cancel.

b. In the message, highlight OK, and then press Enter.


The BIOS Setup Utility screen appears with the cursor highlighting the first value on the
screen.

4. Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Alternatively, you can save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility by navigating to the
Save & Exit Menu and selecting Save Changes and Reset.

Related Information

■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247


■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246
■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 255


Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode

Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode

The BIOS firmware supports both Legacy BIOS BOOT Mode and UEFI BIOS Boot Mode.
The default setting is Legacy BIOS Boot Mode. For more information about selecting the BIOS
boot mode, refer to “Using UEFI” on page 250.

1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.


See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. From the BIOS Main Menu screen, select Boot.


The Boot Menu screen appears.

3. From the Boot Menu screen, use the up and down arrow keys to select UEFI/
Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, and then press Enter.
The UEFI/BIOS dialog box appears.

256 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Select the Boot Device

Note - You cannot configure the boot device priority after switching the boot mode. A system
reboot is required to properly populate the Boot Options Priority list with devices that support
the chosen boot mode.

4. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the appropriate Legacy or UEFI mode,
and then press Enter.

5. Press F10 to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information

■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246


■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247

Select the Boot Device

The Boot Options Priority list contents depend on which BIOS mode is selected. When UEFI
Boot Mode is selected, only UEFI boot candidates will be initialized and displayed in the Boot
Options Priority list. When Legacy BIOS is selected, only Legacy BIOS boot candidates are
initialized and displayed.

In addition to using the F2 key to view or edit the system BIOS settings, you can use the F8
key during the BIOS startup to specify a temporary boot device. This selected boot device is in
effect only for the current system boot. The permanent boot device specified using the F2 key
will be in effect after booting from the temporary boot device.

1. Reset or power on the server.

■ From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
■ From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
■ From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System

2. Press the F8 key (or Ctrl+P from a serial connection) when prompted while the
UEFI is running the power-on self-test (POST).

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 257


Select the Boot Device

The Please Select Boot Device dialog box appears.

3. In the Please Select Boot Device dialog box, select the boot device according to
the operating system and UEFI Boot Mode you elected to use, and then press
Enter.

Note - Based on the boot mode you selected (UEFI BIOS Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot
Mode), the Please Select Boot Device dialog box displays only the applicable devices. For
example, when the UEFI BIOS Boot Mode is elected, only UEFI BIOS boot devices are
displayed in the dialog box.

258 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure TPM Support

A dialog box similar to the following appears.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the operating system from the
selected boot device.

Related Information

■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246


■ “BIOS Key Mappings” on page 247

Configure TPM Support

If you intend to use the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) feature set, you must configure the
server to support this feature.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 259


Configure TPM Support

Note - TPM enables you to administer the TPM security hardware in your server. For additional
information about implementing this feature, refer to the Windows Trusted Platform Module
Management documentation provided by your operating system or third-party software vendor.

1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.


See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the Advanced Menu.


The Advanced Menu screen appears.

3. In the Advanced Menu screen, select Trusted Computing.


The TPM Configuration screen appears.

4. TPM Support is listed as Disabled (it is disabled by default). Select TPM Support
and press Enter.

260 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure TPM Support

A TPM Support dialog box appears.

5. In the dialog box, set TPM Support to Enable, and then press Enter.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 261


Configure SP Network Settings

The updated TPM Configuration screen appears.

6. Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246
■ Microsoft's Windows Trusted Platform Module Management documentation

Configure SP Network Settings


Choose one of the following methods to specify service processor (SP) network settings:
■ BIOS – Assign the IP address for the server SP from the BIOS Setup Utility on the
Advanced Menu.
■ Oracle ILOM – For instructions on setting the IP address for the server SP using Oracle
ILOM, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation
Library at https://www.oracle.com./goto/ilom/docs.

262 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure SP Network Settings

1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.


See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the Advanced Menu.


The Advanced Menu screen appears.

3. In the Advanced Menu, select BMC Network Configuration, and then press Enter.
The BMC Network Configuration screen appears.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 263


Configure SP Network Settings

The BMC is the Baseboard Management Controller.

4. Select Refresh, and then press Enter to display the current BMC network
settings.

264 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure Option ROM Settings

The BMC Network Configuration screen refreshes. Scroll down to review BMC network
settings.

5. Select Commit to update the BMC network settings with the latest values.

6. Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246

Configure Option ROM Settings


1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the IO Menu.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 265


Configure Option ROM Settings

The IO Menu screen appears.

3. In the IO Menu, select either Internal Devices or Add In Cards and press Enter
to display the internal device or add-in card slot for which you want to enable or
disable Option ROM.

266 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure Option ROM Settings

The Internal Devices or Add In Cards screen appears.

4. Select the internal device or add In card slot that you want to configure.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 267


Configure Option ROM Settings

The Option ROM screen for that internal device or add-in card slot appears.

5. Select OpROM Enable and press Enter. Do one of the following:

■ Select Enabled to enable the Option ROM setting.

■ Select Disabled to disable the Option ROM setting.

6. Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information

■ “Legacy Option ROM Allocation” on page 253


■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247
■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246

268 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure I/O Resource Allocation

Configure I/O Resource Allocation

1. Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.


See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247.

2. In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the IO Menu.


The IO Menu screen appears.

3. Select Add In Cards and press Enter to display the add-in card slots.

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 269


Configure I/O Resource Allocation

The Add In Cards screen appears.

4. Select the slot for which you want to configure the card, and press Enter.

270 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Configure I/O Resource Allocation

The IO resource allocation screen for that add-in card slot appears.

5. Do one of the following:

■ Select Enabled to enable I/O resource allocation for the I/O card.

■ Select Disabled to disable I/O resource allocation for the I/O card.

6. Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.

Related Information

■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247


■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 271


Exit BIOS Setup Utility

Exit BIOS Setup Utility


1. Use the left and right arrow keys to navigate to the top-level Save & Exit Menu.

2. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired action.

3. Press Enter to select the option.


A confirmation dialog box appears.

4. In the confirmation dialog box, select Yes to proceed and exit the BIOS Setup
Utility, or select No to stop the exit process.

Note - After modifying any BIOS settings and selecting Save Changes and Exit from the
Save & Exit Menu, the subsequent reboot might take longer than a typical reboot where no
settings were modified. The additional delay is required to ensure that changes to the BIOS
settings are synchronized with Oracle ILOM.

Related Information
■ “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 247

272 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Exit BIOS Setup Utility

■ “BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 246

Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters 273


274 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options

This section includes screenshots of the main menus in the BIOS Setup Utility for the Oracle
Server X6-2L. Following the screenshot for each menu is a table of the options available from
that menu.

Description Links
Review the BIOS Main Menu selections. “BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 275
Review the BIOS Advanced Menu selections. “BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 279
Review the BIOS IO Menu selections. “BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 292
Review the Boot Menu selections. “BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 295
Review the BIOS Exit Menu selections. “BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 297

Related Information

■ Oracle X6 Series Servers Administration Guide at: http://www.oracle.com/goto/


x86admindiag/docs
■ “Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters” on page 245

BIOS Main Menu Selections

This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Main Menu. The options that are available from
the Main Menu are described in the table that follows. Options in the table that are marked as
“(R/O)” are read-only information and cannot be changed.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 275


BIOS Main Menu Selections

The following table describes the options provided by the BIOS Main menu and sub-menus.

TABLE 22 BIOS Main Menu Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Project Version (R/O) BIOS version is displayed. This string
is a unique identifier used to reference
a specific BIOS release. Format is
XXYYZZPP, which indicates:

■ XX - Unique project/platform code.


■ YY - BIOS major release.
■ ZZ - BIOS minor release.
■ PP - Build number.

Example: 18.01.04.01
System Date Current date is displayed. You can
change the date setting.

Example: [Thu 06/20/2014]


System Time Current time is displayed. You can
change the time setting.

Example: [13:38:27]

276 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Main Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


QPI Link Speed (R/O) SLOW/ Intel Quick Path Interconnect (QPI)
operational speed is displayed. The
6.4 GT/s SLOW option displays as unknown in
single-processor systems.
7.2 GT/s

8.0 GT/s

9.6 GT/s
Total Memory (R/O) Memory in gigabytes is displayed.

Example: 224 GB
Current Memory Speed (R/O) Memory speed is displayed.

Example: 1333 MHz


USB Devices (R/O) Detected USB devices are displayed.

Example: 1 Drive, 2 keyboards, 1 mouse,


3 hubs
BMC Status (R/O) Detected condition of the service
processor.

Example: BMC is working


BMC Firmware Revision (R/O) The service processor firmware version
is displayed.

Example: 3.2.0.0 r84011


PRODUCT INFORMATION Product information is displayed.
(R/O)
Product Name Product name is displayed.

Example: Oracle Server X6-2L


Product Serial Number Product serial number is displayed.

Example: 1134FML00V
Board Serial Number Board serial number is displayed.

Example: 0328MSL-1132U900
CPU INFORMATION (R/O) Attributes of a single processor (CPU)
are defined. A separate information
structure is provided for each processor
supported in the system. Most of the
values are dependent on the processor.
Socket 0 CPU Information (R/O) If CPU socket 0 is populated, the
following options are listed. Otherwise,
displays “Not Present.”
Genuine Intel CPU @ 2.6 GHz Processor ID brand is displayed.
CPU Signature Processor information is displayed.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 277


BIOS Main Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Example: 306F1
Microcode Patch Software update (microcode patch)
information is displayed.

Example: 80000011
Max CPU Speed Maximum non-turbo speed of the
processor is displayed.

Example: 2100 MHz


Min CPU Speed Minimum speed of the processor is
displayed.

Example: 1200 MHz


Processor Cores Number of available processor cores is
displayed.

Example: 18
Active processor cores Number of active processor cores is
displayed.
Intel HT Technology Indicates whether Intel Hyper Threading
is supported.
Intel VT-x Technology Indicates whether Intel Virtualization
Technology is supported.
L1 Data Cache Example: 448
L1 Code Cache Example: 448
L2 Cache Example: 3584 KB
L3 Cache Example: 35840 KB
Socket 1 CPU Information (R/O) If CPU socket 1 is populated, the same
options as Socket 0 CPU Information
are displayed. Otherwise, displays “Not
Present.”
DIMM INFORMATION (R/O) Memory module (DIMM) presence and
size information are displayed.
Socket 0 DIMMs (R/O) For D0...D11, if a DIMM is present,
memory size (in gigabytes) is displayed.
Otherwise, displays “Not Present.”
Socket 1 DIMMs (R/O) Same as CPU socket 0.
SECURITY SETTING Configure the security setting.
Administrator Password Set the Administrator password.

Related Information

■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 279

278 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

■ “BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 292


■ “BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 295
■ “BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 297

BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Advanced Menu. The options that are available
from the Advanced Menu are described in the sections that follow. Options in the tables that are
marked as “(R/O)” are read-only information and cannot be changed.

The following sections describe the BIOS Advanced Menu options:


■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration Options” on page 280
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration Options” on page 281
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option” on page 282
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options” on page 282
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options” on page 283

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 279


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options” on page 284


■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options” on page 285
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options” on page 286
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options” on page 289
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options” on page 291

BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration


Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu processor configuration options.

TABLE 23 BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Hyper-threading Disabled/Enabled Enabled Use to enable Hyper Threading.
When enabled, two threads
are available per enabled core.
When disabled, only one thread
per enabled core is available.
Active Processor Cores A minimum of one up to the All The number of cores to enable in
maximum number of cores each processor package.
available in the processor
package.
Execute Disable Bit Disabled/Enabled Enabled When disabled, forces XD
features flag to always return 0.
Hardware Prefetcher Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable the mid-level cache
(MLC) streamer prefetcher
(MSR 1A4h bit [0]).
Adjacent Cache Prefetch Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable the mid-level cache
(MLC) streamer prefetcher
(MSR 1A4h bit [1]).
DCU Streamer Prefetcher Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable DCU streamer
prefetcher, which is a L1 data
cache prefetcher (MSR 1A4h
[2]).
DCP IP Prefetcher Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable DCU IP prefetcher,
which is a L1 data cache
prefetcher (MSR 1A4h [3]).
Intel Virtualization Technology Disabled/Enabled Enabled When enabled, a Virtual
Machine Manager (VMM) can
utilize the additional hardware
capabilities provided by Intel
Virtualization Technology.

280 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management


Configuration Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu CPU power management
configuration options.

TABLE 24 BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Power Technology Disabled/Energy Efficient/ Custom Enables the power management
Custom features.
EIST (GV3) Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enable or disable Enhanced Intel
SpeedStep Technology (EIST).
Turbo Mode Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled mode is supported only
if Turbo Mode is supported in
the CPU. Enabled mode also
requires that Enhanced Multi
Threaded Thermal Monitoring
(EMTTM) be enabled on the
CPU.
CPU C3 report Enabled/Disabled Disabled Enable/disable the CPU
C3 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
CPU C6 report Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enable/disable the CPU
C6 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
CPU C7 report Enabled/Disabled Disabled Enable/disable the CPU
C7 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
Package C State limit Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enable/disable Package C State
limit.
Energy_PERF_BIAS_CFG PERF/Balanced Perf/Balanced Balanced Perf Use this option to select the
mode Power/Power Energy_PERF_BIAS_CFG
mode.
Uncore Frequency Scaling Enabled/Disabled Disabled Enable/disable Uncore
Frequency Scaling (USF).
Enable CPU HWPM Disable/ HWPM Native Mode/ Disable Select HWPM modes for better
HWPM OOB Mode CPU energy performance.
Enable CPU Autonomous Cstate Enable/Disable Disable Enables CPU Autonomous C
State.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 281


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration


Option
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu memory configuration option.

TABLE 25 BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option

Setup Option Options Defaults Description


Numa Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enable or disable Non Uniform
Memory Access (NUMA).
COD Enable Enabled/Disabled Disabled Enable or disable Cluster on
Die.

BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options


The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu USB ports options.

TABLE 26 BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


EHCI Hand-off Disabled/Enabled Disabled Enable or disable Enhanced
Host Controller Interface
(EHCI) hand-off support. This
is a workaround for operating
systems without EHCI hand-off
support. The EHCI change of
ownership should be claimed by
the EHCI driver.
Port 60/64 Emulation Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable I/O port 60h/64h
emulation support. Enable
this setting for the complete
USB keyboard legacy support
for non-USB aware operating
systems.
Rear Port #0 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Rear Port
0.
Rear Port #1 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Rear Port
1.
Front Port #0 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Front
Port 0.
Front Port #1 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Front
Port 1.

282 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Internal Port #0 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Internal
Port 0.
Internal Port #1 Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable USB Internal
Port 1.

BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console


Redirection Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu serial port console redirection options.

TABLE 27 BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
EMS Console Redirection Disabled/Enabled Disabled Enable or disable console
redirection for Windows
Emergency Management
Service (EMS) administration.
Console Redirection Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable console
redirection.
Terminal Type VT100/VT100+/VT-UTF8/ VT100+ Select the emulation for the
ANSI terminal:

■ VT100: ASCII character set.


■ VT100+: Extends VT100 to
support color, function keys,
etc.
■ VT-UTF8: Uses UTF8
encoding to map Unicode
characters onto one or more
bytes.
■ ANSI: Extended ASCII
character set.
Bits per Second 9600 9600 Select the serial port
transmission speed. The
19200 speed must be matched on the
connecting serial device. Long
38400 or noisy lines require lower
speeds.
57600

115200
Data Bits 7/8 8 Select the data bits.
Parity None/Even/Odd/Mark/Space None A parity bit can be sent with
the data bits to detect some
transmission errors.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 283


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


■ None: No parity bits are
sent.
■ Even: Parity bit is 0 if the
number of 1s in the data bits
is even.
■ Odd: Parity bit is 0 if the
number of 1s in the data bits
is odd.
■ Mark: Parity bit is always 1.
■ Space: Parity bit is always 0.

Mark and Space parity do not


allow for error detection. They
can be used as an additional data
bit.
Stop Bits 1/2 1 Stop bits indicate the end of
a serial data packet. (A start
bit indicates the beginning
of a serial data packet.) The
standard setting is 1 stop bit.
Communication with slow
devices may require more than 1
stop bit.
Flow Control None, Hardware RTS/CTS, None Flow control can prevent data
Software Xon/Xoff loss from buffer overflow. When
sending data, if the receiving
buffers are full, a 'stop' signal
can be sent to stop the data flow.
Once the buffers are empty, a
'start' signal can be sent to restart
the flow. Hardware flow control
uses two wires to send start/stop
signals.

BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options


The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu trusted computing options.

TABLE 28 BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


TPM Support Disabled/Enabled Disabled Enable or disable Trusted
Platform Module (TPM)
support. Only UEFI BIOS
implements this setup option. If
disabled, the OS will not show

284 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


TPM. Reset of the platform is
required.
TPM State Disabled/Enabled Disabled Displays whether TPM Support
is enabled.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
Pending Operation None/Enable Take Ownership/ None Used to schedule an operation
Disable Take Ownership/TPM for the security device.
Clear Note - Your computer will
reboot during restart in order to
change the state of a security
device.
Current Status Information If TPM Support is disabled,
Current Status Information
displays SUPPORT Turned
OFF.”
TPM Enabled Status Disabled/Enabled Disabled Use this option to provide the
current capability state of the
security device.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
TPM Active Status Deactivated/Activated Deactivated Use this option to provide the
current capability state of the
security device.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
TPM Owner Status Owned/Unowned Unowned Use this option to provide the
current ownership state.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.

BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options


The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu network stack options.

TABLE 29 BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
Network Stack Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable the UEFI
network stack.
Ipv4 PXE Support Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable IPv4 PXE
Boot support. If disable, the

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 285


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


IPv4 Boot Option will not be
created.
Ipv6 PXE Support Disabled/Enabled Disabled Enable or disable IPv6 PXE
Boot support. If disable, the
IPv6 Boot Option will not be
created.

BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration


Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu BMC network configuration options.

TABLE 30 BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Current Active Management NA NETMGT The currently active
Port (R/O) management port.
Refresh NA NA Refresh current BMC LAN
information with the latest
information from the service
processor.
Active Mgmt Port NET MGT/NET0/NET1/NET2/ NET MGT Use to change the currently
NET3 active network management
port.
Commit NA NA Commit the current BMC
network LAN information.
IPv4 Configuration NA NA Current configuration of the
IPv4 settings is displayed.
Channel Number (R/O) 1 Current channel number is
displayed.
Current IPv4 IP Assignment in Static/Dynamic Static Set the IPV4 IP assignment to
BMC (R/O) Static or Dynamic. This setting
determines whether the service
processor is assigned a static
IPv4 address or assigned a
dynamic IPv4 address using
Dynamic Host Control Protocol
(DHCP).
Current IPv4 address in BMC NA NA Displays the current IPv4
(R/O) address in the BMC.
Current IPv4 MAC Address in NA NA If IPv4 Assignment is set to
BMC (R/O) Static, set the IPv4 address for
the service processor.

286 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Example: 172.31.255.255
Current IPv4 Subnet Mask in NA NA If the IPv4 Assignment is set to
BMC (R/O) Static, set the IPv4 subnet mask.

Example: 255.255.255.0
Current IPv4 Default Gateway NA NA If the IPv4 Assignment is set
in BMC to Static, set the IPv4 default
gateway

Example: 172.31.255.255
Refresh Refresh the current BMC LAN
information.
IPv4 IP Assignment Static/Dynamic Static Current IPv4 assignment.
IPv4 Address NA NA If set, current IPv4 address is
displayed.
IPv4 Subnet Mask NA NA If set, current IPv4 Subnet Mask
is displayed.
IPv4 Default Gateway NA NA If set, current IPv4 Default
Gateway is displayed.
Commit Commit the current BMC LAN
information.
IPv6 Configuration Current configuration of the
IPv6 settings is displayed.

IPv6 addresses are written with


hexadecimal digits and colon
separators. For example: 2001:
0db0:000:82a1:0000:0000:1234:
abcd.

IPv6 addresses are composed of


two parts: a 64-bit subnet prefix
and a 64-bit host interface ID.
To shorten the IPv6 address, you
can (1) omit all leading zeros,
and (2) replace one consecutive
group of zeros with a double
colon (::). For example: 2001:
db0:0:82a1::1234:abcd.
Channel Number (R/O) 1 Current channel number is
displayed.
Current IPv6 State (R/O) Enabled/Disabled Enabled Current IPv6 state is displayed.
Current IPv6 Auto Stateful/Stateless Stateless Current IPv6 autoconfiguration
Configuration (R/O) parameters are displayed.
Link Local IPv6 Address (R/O) Current link local IPv6 address
is displayed.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 287


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Example: fe80::214:4fff:feca:
5f7e/64
Static IPv6 Address (R/O) Current static IPv6 address is
displayed.

Example: 2001:0db0:000:82a1:
0000:0000:1234:abcd
IPv6 Gateway (R/O) Current IPv6 gateway address is
displayed.

Example: fe80::211:5dff:febe:
5000/128
Dynamic IPv6 Address 1-n (R/ Current dynamic IPv6 addresses
O) are displayed.

Example: fec0:a:8:b7:214:4fff:
feca:5f7e/64
Refresh Select Refresh to update to the
current settings.
IPv6 State Disabled/Enabled Disabled Set the IPv6 state to enabled or
disabled.
Auto IPv6 Configuration Disabled/ Disabled Autoconfiguration options are:

Stateless/ ■ Disabled: When


autoconfiguration is
Dhcpv6_stateless/ disabled, only the Link
Local address is set. None
Dhcpv6_stateful of the autoconfiguration
options to configure an IPv6
address are run.
■ Stateless: When enabled,
the IPv6 Stateless
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the IPv6 addresses for
the device.
■ Dhcpv6_stateless:
When enabled, the
Dhcpv6_stateless
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the DNS and domain
information for the device.
■ Dhcpv6_stateful: When
enabled, the Dhcpv6_stateful
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the IP addresses and
DNS information for the
device.
Static IPv6 Address (R/O) Set the static IPv6 address.

288 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Example: 2001:0db0:000.82a1:
0000:0000:1234:abcd
Commit Commit the current BMC LAN
information.

BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration


Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI configuration options.

TABLE 31 BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


iSCSI Initiator Name NA (must be specified) None The worldwide unique name of
the iSCSI Initiator. Only IQN
format is accepted.
Add an Attempt
iSCSI Attempt Name NA (must be specified) None The readable name that you
assigned to this attempt.
iSCSI Mode Disabled/Enabled/Enabled for Disabled Set to Enabled for multipath I/
MPIO O (MPIO). MPIO can boost the
performance of an application
by load balancing traffic across
multiple ports.
Internet Protocol IP4/IP6/Autoconfigure IP4 Can be set to IP4, IP6, or
Autoconfigure. The initiator
IP address is assigned by the
system to IP6. In Autoconfigure
mode, the iSCSI driver attempts
to connect to the iSCSI target
using the IPv4 stack. If this fails,
then the iSCSI driver attempt to
connect using the IPv6 stack.
Connection Retry Count 0 to 16 0 The count range is 0 to 16. If set
to 0, there are no retries.
Connection Establishing NA 1,000 The timeout value in
Timeout milliseconds. The minimum
value is 100 milliseconds and
the maximum is 20 seconds.
Configure ISID Derived from the MAC address The default value is derived The OUI-format ISID is 6 bytes.
from the Mac Address The default value is derived
from the MAC address. Only the
last 3 bytes are configurable.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 289


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Example: Update
0ABBCCDDEEFF to
0ABBCCF07901 by inputting
F07901
Enable DHCP Disabled/Enabled Disabled Enable or disable DHCP
Initiator IP Address NA 0.0.0.0 Use to set initiator IP address in
dotted-decimal notation.
Initiator Subnet Mask NA 0.0.0.0 Use to set initiator subnet mask
IP address in dotted-decimal
notation.
Gateway NA 0.0.0.0 Use to set initiator gateway
IP address in dotted-decimal
notation.
Target Name NA NA The worldwide unique name of
the target. Only IQN format is
accepted.
Target IP address 0.0.0.0 None Use to set target IP address in
dotted-decimal notation.
Target Port 3260 Use to change target port
number.
Boot LUN 0 Use to set the hexadecimal
representation of the boot logical
unit number (LUN).

Example: 4752-3A4F-6b7e-
2F99
Authentication Type CHAP/None CHAP Define the Challenge-
Handshake Authentication
Protocol (CHAP). Available
settings are CHAP, Kerberos,
and None.
CHAP Type One Way/Mutual One Way Use to set CHAP type to either
One Way or Mutual.
CHAP Name NA None Use to set CHAP name.
CHAP Secret NA None Use to set the CHAP secret
password. The secret length
range is 12 to 16 bytes.
Delete Attempts NA NA Use to delete one or more
attempts.
Change Attempt Order NA NA Use to change the order of
attempts. Use arrow keys to
select the attempt, then press +/-
keys to move the attempt up/
down in the attempt order list.

290 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Advanced Menu Selections

BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options


The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet controller options.

TABLE 32 BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Port Configuration Menu
NIC configuration Use to configure the network
device port.
Link Speed (R/O) Supported port speeds/Auto NA Specifies the port speed used for
Negotiate the selected boot protocol.
Note - This option is not
supported
Wake on LAN Disable/Enabled NA Enable or disable wake on LAN.
Note - This option is not
supported
Blink LEDs 0/1/2/3 0 Use to identify the physical
network port by blinking the
associated LED.
Port Configuration Displays and specifies the port
Information settings for the network device.
UEFI Driver (R/O) NA NA Identifies the UEFI driver.
Adapter PBA (R/O) NA NA Product board adapter (PBA)
number. You can use the Intel
Network Adapter PBA number
to search for the adapter's model
number. The PBA number is
a nine digit number that is the
last part of the adapter board
serial number. The PBA number
is presented in this format:
xxxxxxx-xxx, for example,
C80222-001.
Chip Type (R/O) NA NA Manufacturer and model number
PCI Device ID (R/O) 1528 Device identifier
PCI Address (R/O) NA NA Bus device function identifier

Example format: Bus:Device:


Function
Link Status Connected/Disconnected Disconnected Specifies the link status of the
network port.
MAC Address (R/O) NA None Lists the MAC address of the
network interface card (NIC).

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 291


BIOS IO Menu Selections

Related Information
■ “BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 275
■ “BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 292
■ “BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 295
■ “BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 297

BIOS IO Menu Selections

This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS IO Menu. The options that are available from
the IO Menu are described in the sections that follow.

Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, 3, and Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-
processor systems.

The following sections describe the BIOS IO Menu options.


■ “BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options” on page 293

292 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS IO Menu Selections

■ “BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options” on page 293


■ “BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options” on page 294
■ “BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options” on page 294
■ “BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options” on page 295

BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options


The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu PCI subsystem settings options.

TABLE 33 BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
PCI 64 Bit Resources Allocation Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable 64-bit capable
devices to be decoded in above
4G address space. This setting
is available only if the system
supports 64-bit decoding.

BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options


The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu IO virtualization options.

TABLE 34 BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
VT-d Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable Intel
Virtualization Technology for
directed I/O (VT-d) by reporting
the I/O device assignment to
VMM through DMA remapping
reporting (DMAR) Advance
Configuration Power Interface
(ACPI) tables.
SR-IOV Disabled/Enabled Enabled Single Root I/O Virtualization
(SR-IOV) is used to configure
devices into multiple virtual
devices that can be used on
virtual OS installations. If
supported by the hardware
and set to enabled, all devices
within the system that are SR-
IOV capable are configured
to support SR-IOV and I/O

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 293


BIOS IO Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


resources are allocated to the
device as normal. If set to
disabled, I/O resources are not
allocated to the device.
ARI Disabled/Enabled Enabled If Alternate Routing ID (ARI)
is supported by the hardware
and set to enabled, devices
are permitted to locate virtual
functions (VFs) in function
numbers 8 to 255 of the captured
bus number, instead of normal
function numbers 0 to 7.

BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options


The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu I/OAT configuration options.

TABLE 35 BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
Intel I/OAT Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable Intel I/OAT.
DCA Support Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable direct cache
access (DCA) support.

BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options


The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu internal devices options.

TABLE 36 BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options


Setup Options Options Defaults Description
NET0 Displays and provides options
to change the internal device
settings.
OpROM Enable Disabled/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable Option ROM.
If set to enabled, Option ROM
for the card executes as normal.
If set to disabled, Option ROM
for the card is not copied into
memory and the execution of the
Option ROM is inhibited.
NET1, NET2, and NET3 See NET0 description.

294 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Boot Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Note - Ethernet ports NET2
and NET3 are nonfunctional in
single-processor systems.

BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options


The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu add in cards options.

TABLE 37 BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Slot 1 Displays and provides options
Note - PCIe slot 1, slot 2, and to change the settings of the
slot 3 are nonfunctional in devices in PCIe slots.
single-processor systems.
OpROM Enable Disable/Enabled Enabled Enable or disable Option ROM
for add-in card.
Slot 2, Slot 3, Slot 4, Slot 5, See Slot 1 description
and Slot 6

Related Information

■ “BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 275


■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 279
■ “BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 295
■ “BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 297

BIOS Boot Menu Selections

This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Boot Menu. The options that are available from
the Boot Menu are described in the table that follows.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 295


BIOS Boot Menu Selections

TABLE 38 BIOS Boot Menu Options

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


UEFI/BIOS Boot Mode Legacy/UEFI Legacy Select either Legacy BIOS or UEFI as
the boot mode.

■ Enable UEFI: Only UEFI BIOS boot


options are initialized and presented
to the user.
■ Enable Legacy BIOS: Only Legacy
BIOS boot options are initialized and
presented to the user.
Retry Boot List Disabled/Enabled Enabled If enabled, BIOS automatically retries
to boot from the top of the Boot Options
Priority list when all devices have been
attempted and failed.
Network Boot Retry Disabled/Enabled/Boot Enabled If enabled, BIOS automatically retries
List the PXE list present in the system when
all PXE attempts have failed. If set to
disabled, the system halts and displays
the error message “Network Boot Failed”
when all PXE boots failed. If set to Boot
List, fail over to the main Boot Options
Priority list.

296 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


BIOS Exit Menu Selections

Setup Options Options Defaults Description


Persistent Boot Support Disabled/Enabled Disabled If enabled, the Persistent Boot feature is
enabled. If disabled, system reverts back
to the default boot handling from the next
boot.
NVMe Boot Disabled/Enabled Enabled BIOS supports booting to UEFI\Legacy
OS that is present in the NVMe device.
Legacy Boot Option Priority UEFI/Legacy Legacy Displays the system boot order.

Related Information

■ “BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 275


■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 279
■ “BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 292
■ “BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 297

BIOS Exit Menu Selections

This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Exit Menu. The options that are available from
the Exit Menu are described in the table that follows.

BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options 297


BIOS Exit Menu Selections

TABLE 39 BIOS Exit Menu Options


Setup Options Description
Save Changes and Exit Save changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Discard Changes and Exit Exit the BIOS Setup Utility without saving changes.
Discard Changes Discard any changes made to the setup options.
Restore Defaults Restore/load the optimal default values for all of the setup options.

Related Information
■ “BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 275
■ “BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 279
■ “BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 292
■ “BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 295

298 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP
Messages

This section includes information about monitoring components and identifying SNMP
messages for the Oracle Server X6-2L.

Description Links
Review how Oracle ILOM monitors component health “Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle
and faults. ILOM” on page 299
Review information about system components and “Monitoring System Components” on page 300
nomenclature.
Review SNMP traps generated by the server. “Identifying SNMP Trap Messages” on page 311

Related Information
■ Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at: https://
www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs

Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle


ILOM
The Oracle ILOM 5.0 interfaces provide easy-to-view information about the health status of
system components. From the Oracle ILOM web interface or in the Oracle ILOM command-
line interface (CLI), you can collect system-specific information about the server, determine the
health state of discrete components, and view any open problems on the server. Oracle ILOM
automatically detects system hardware faults and environmental conditions on the server. If a
problem occurs on the server, Oracle ILOM will automatically do the following:
■ Illuminate the Service Required status indicator (LED) on the server front and back panels.
■ Identify the faulted component in the Open Problems table.
■ Record system information about the faulted component or condition in the event log.

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 299


Monitoring System Components

For further information about administering open problems that are detected and reported by
Oracle ILOM, refer to “Administering Open Problems” in the Oracle ILOM Administrator's
Guide for Configuration and Maintenance Firmware Release 5.0.x in the Oracle Integrated
Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/
ilom/docs.

Related Information
■ Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at: https://
www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs

Monitoring System Components

The tables in this section identify the system components and describe the naming conventions
applied to the components of the Oracle Server X6-2L.

Each section corresponds to an IPMI entity ID and lists sensors, indicators, and field-
replaceable units (FRUs) related to that entity. The tables contain the following fields:
■ Component Name – Shows the user-visible component name used in management
interfaces to refer to a specific sensor, indicator, or FRU. The IPMI name is a shortened
form of the component name, and is indicated by the boldface portion of the component
name.
■ IPMI Type – Indicates the type of sensor, indicator, or FRU represented.
■ Description – Describes the particular component name reference.
■ Values – Defines the states of the sensor, indicator, or FRU entity, and any specific units or
values that are expected, if applicable.

Note - Some component names are hidden in the Oracle ILOM user interfaces. These names
are marked as hidden in the tables. Further, as of Oracle ILOM 3.1, the Oracle ILOM 3.0 legacy
targets /SYS and /STORAGE have been replaced by /System. Even though these legacy targets
might be hidden, you can still use them to issue commands. For information on legacy targets,
see the ILOM 3.1 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

This section includes information for the following server components:


■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305

300 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring System Components

■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306


■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

System Chassis Components

The following table lists the system chassis components.

Component Name (Oracle IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)


ILOM CLI Targets)
/SYS FRU Product information only
/SYS/UUID FRU Unique system ID Derived from host MAC address.
Used for PXE boot and licensing.
/SYS/ACPI State sensor Advanced Configuration and (hidden)
Power Interface
01h-ACPI_ON_WORKING

20h-ACPI_SOFT_OFF
/SYS/VPS Threshold Virtual power sensor Watts
sensor
/SYS/VPS_CPUS Threshold Virtual power sensor (CPUs) Watts
sensor
/SYS/VPS_MEMORY Threshold Virtual power sensor (Memory) Watts
sensor
/SYS/VPS_FANS Threshold Virtual power sensor (Fans) Watts
sensor
/SYS/INTSW Discrete Chassis intrusion switch 01h-Deasserted
sensor
02h-Asserted
/SYS/T_AMB Threshold Ambient temperature on system Degrees Celsius
sensor motherboard, located behind
the left side front SIS indicator.
/SYS/TEMP_FAULT Indicator Temperature Fault LED Color: Amber

Location: Front panel

Off: Normal

On: Chassis overtemp fault


/SYS/OK Indicator Power OK LED Color: Green

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 301


Monitoring System Components

Component Name (Oracle IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)


ILOM CLI Targets)
Location: Front panel

Off: Power is off.

Standby blink: Standby power is on;


Oracle ILOM SP is running.

Slow blink: Startup sequence


initiated on host.

On: Host is booting OS or running


the OS.
/SYS/SERVICE Indicator Service Required LED Color: Amber

Location: Front panel

Off: Normal

On: Server requires service.


/SYS/LOCATE Indicator Locator LED Color: White

Location: Front and rear panels

Off: Normal

Fast blink: Locate function is


activated; self-extinguishes after 30
minutes.
/SYS/HOST_ERR Discrete Host asserted error sensor 01h-Deasserted
sensor
02h-Asserted
/SYS/PS_FAULT Indicator Rear Power Supply Fault LED Color: Amber

Location: Mainboard

Off: Normal

On: General power supply fault


/SYS/FAN_FAULT Indicator Top Fan Fault LED Color: Amber

Location: Mainboard

Off: Normal

On: General fan fault

Related Information
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304

302 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring System Components

■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305


■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Cooling Unit Components

The system has 3.5-inch fan modules with two fans in each module. The following table lists
the system cooling unit components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
CLI Targets)
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3] FRU Fan module FRU
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-x] FRU Individual fan
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/PRSNT Discrete Fan module is present. 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
sensor
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-x]/TACH Threshold Fan module fan speed RPM
sensor
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/SERVICE Indicator Fan Service Required LED Color: Amber

Location: Mainboard

Off: Normal

On: Fan module was


diagnosed as faulty.

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 303


Monitoring System Components

■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Disk Backplane Components

The following table lists the disk backplane (DBP) components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
Targets)
/SYS/DBP FRU Disk backplane FRU
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP FRU SAS Expander FRU
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP/PRSNT Discrete sensor SAS Expander board 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
presence
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP/T_CORE Threshold SAS Expander Degrees Celsius
sensor board temperature,
reported by
Expander CPLD
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x] Pseudo Hard disk drives
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/PRSNT Discrete sensor Hard disk drive 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
presence
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE State sensor Hard disk drive state 02h-DRIVE_FAULT

04h-PREDICTIVE_FAILURE

08h-HOT_SPARE
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/SERVICE Indicator Service Required Color: Amber
LED
Location: Hard disk drive
(HDD)

Off: Normal

On: HDD was diagnosed as


faulty
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/OK2RM Indicator OK to remove Color: Blue

Location: HDD drive

Off: Normal

On: OK to remove HDD


/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x] NVMe drives
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]/PRSNT Discrete sensor NVMe device 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
presence
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT

304 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring System Components

Related Information

■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301


■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Memory Device Components

The following table lists the memory device components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
Targets)
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11] FRU Host CPU DIMM
FRU
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]/PRSNT Discrete Host CPU DIMM is 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
sensor present.
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]/SERVICE Indicator Host CPU DIMM Color: Amber
Service Required
LED Location: Mainboard

Off: Normal

On: DIMM was diagnosed as


faulty.

Related Information

■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301


■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 305


Monitoring System Components

■ “System Board Components” on page 308


■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Power Unit Components

The following table lists the power unit components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
Targets)
/SYS/PS[0-1] FRU Power supply FRU
/SYS/PS[0-1]/PRSNT Discrete sensor Power supply is 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
present
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE Discrete sensor Multistate, power Presence detected
supply sensor type,
per IPMI Failure detected

Predictive failure

Power supply input lost

Power supply input lost or


out-of-range

Power supply input out-of-


range

Configuration error
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN Power sensor Input power draw Watts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT Power sensor Output power Watts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN Voltage sensor Input voltage Volts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V Voltage sensor 12V output voltage Volts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY Voltage sensor 12V standby Volts
output voltage
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT Temperature sensor Ambient Degrees Celsius
temperature

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303

306 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring System Components

■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304


■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Processor Components

The following table lists the processor (CPU) components.

Component Name (Oracle IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)


ILOM CLI Targets)
/SYS/MB/P[0-x] FRU Host CPU FRU
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT Discrete Host CPU is present. 01h-ENTITY_PRESENT
sensor
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/SERVICE Indicator Host CPU Service Color: Amber
Required LED
Location: Mainboard

Off: Normal

On: Processor was diagnosed as


faulty.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM Static sensor CPU DIMM bank 1.2V
operating voltage

Related Information

■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301


■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 307


Monitoring System Components

System Board Components

The following table lists the system board components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
CLI Targets)
/SYS/MB FRU General host system board
FRU
/SYS/MB/CPLD FRU Mainboard CPLD/FPGA
firmware version
/SYS/MB/NET[0-3] FRU Host Ethernet FRU
/SYS/MB/PCIE[1-6] FRU PCIe slot
/SYS/MB/PCIE[1-6]/PRSNT Discrete Option card inserted into PCIe 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
sensor slot
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/MB/PCIE3/PCIESW FRU PCIe switch for NVMe
support, optional, dedicated
slot
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE[0-2] Threshold Cooling zone chassis exhaust Degrees Celsius
sensor temperature, located behind the
specified PCIe slots.

■ Zone 0 – PCIe slot 5


■ Zone 1 – PCIe slot 4
■ Zone 2 – PCIe slot 1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE[0-2] Threshold Cooling zone chassis inlet Degrees Celsius
sensor temperature, located in front of
the specified PCIe slots.

■ Zone 0 – PCIe slot 5


■ Zone 1 – PCIe slot 4
■ Zone 2 – PCIe slot 1
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01 Threshold Gigabit Ethernet controller die CPU 0, NET 0+1 Degrees
sensor temperature Celsius
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23 Threshold Gigabit Ethernet controller die CPU 1, NET 2+3 Degrees
sensor temperature Celsius
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS Threshold Power supply unit (PSU) inlet Degrees Celsius
sensor temperature, located directly in
front of the PSU 0 air inlet.
/SYS/SP FRU Service processor FRU
/SYS/SP/OK Indicator SP OK LED Color: Green

Location: Front panel

On: SP is operating.

308 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Monitoring System Components

Component Name (Oracle ILOM IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
CLI Targets)
Off: SP requires service.
/SYS/SP/NET[0-1] FRU SP Ethernet FRU

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

System Firmware Components

The following table lists the system firmware components.

Component Name IPMI Type Description


(Oracle ILOM CLI Target)
/SYS/MB/BIOS FRU BIOS FRU
/SYS/MB/CPLD FRU Mainboard CPLD/FPGA firmware

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 309


Monitoring System Components

Hard Disk Drive Components

The following table lists the hard disk drive (HDD) components.

Component Name (Oracle ILOM IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
CLI Targets)
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1] FRU Rear hard disk drive FRU From host
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/PRSNT Discrete Rear hard disk drive presence 01h-ENTITY_PRESENT,
sensor
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/SERVICE Indicator Rear hard disk drive Service Color: Amber
Required LED
Location: Rear HDD

Off: Normal

On: Hard disk drive (HDD)


was diagnosed as faulty.
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/OK2RM Indicator Rear hard disk drive OK to Color: Blue
Remove LED
Location: Rear HDD

Off: Normal

On: OK to remove
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/STATE Discrete Rear hard disk drive state 02h-DRIVE_FAULT
sensor
04h-
PREDICTIVE_FAILURE

08h-HOT_SPARE
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x] FRU Hard disk drive FRU From host
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/PRSNT Discrete Hard disk drive presence 01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
sensor
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE Discrete Writable multistate, slot/ 02h-DRIVE_FAULT
sensor connector sensor type, per
IPMI 04h-
PREDICTIVE_FAILURE

08h-HOT_SPARE
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/SERVICE Indicator Hard disk drive Service Color: Amber
Required LED
Location: HDD

Off: Normal

On: Hard disk drive was


diagnosed as faulty.

310 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Identifying SNMP Trap Messages

Component Name (Oracle ILOM IPMI Type Description Values (if applicable)
CLI Targets)
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/OK2RM Indicator Hard disk drive OK to Color: Blue
Remove LED
Location: HDD

Off: Normal

On: OK to remove
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x] FRU NVMe drive FRU
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]/PRSNT Discrete PCIe NVMe drive 01h-ENTITY_PRESENT
sensor
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “System Firmware Components” on page 309

Identifying SNMP Trap Messages

It is possible to configure Oracle ILOM to generate Simple Network Management Protocol


(SNMP) traps when hardware problems occur. For information about how to configure SNMP
alert rule destinations to start receiving these traps, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager (ILOM) 5.0 Documentation Library at https://www.oracle.com/goto/ilom/docs.

The tables in these sections list the set of SNMP traps that are generated from Oracle ILOM.
■ “Environmental Events” on page 312
■ “Hard Disk Drive Events” on page 314
■ “Power Events” on page 314
■ “Fan Events” on page 319
■ “Memory Events” on page 320
■ “Entity Presence Events” on page 325

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 311


Environmental Events

■ “Physical Security Events” on page 326

Environmental Events

The following table lists environmental events.

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded /SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0

Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold. /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1

/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2

/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0

Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold. /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1

/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2

/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded /SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0

Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold. /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1

/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2

/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0

312 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Environmental Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold. /SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1

/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2

/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdExceeded /SYS/T_AMB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01

Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdDeasserted /SYS/T_AMB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01

Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23

Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdDeasserted /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23

Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has /SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 313


Hard Disk Drive Events

■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305


■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Hard Disk Drive Events

The following table lists hard disk drive events.

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSlotOrConnectorError /SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Assert

Severity and Description: Major: A sensor associated with a slot or connector has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSlotOrConnectorOk /SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Deassert

Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor associated with a slot or connector has returned
to its normal state.

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Power Events

The following table lists power events.

314 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Power Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PRESENCE ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PRESENCE DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_FAILURE ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_FAILURE DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PREDICTIVE_FAILURE ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PREDICTIVE_FAILURE DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_LOST ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_LOST DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_ERROR ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_ERROR DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 315


Power Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_RANGE_ERROR ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_RANGE_ERROR DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_CONFIG_ERROR ASSERT

Severity and DescriptionMajor; A power supply sensor has detected an error.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError /SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE

Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_CONFIG_ERROR DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/VPS

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded

Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk /SYS/VPS

Oracle ILOM Event Message:Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded

Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/VPS_FANS

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk /SYS/VPS_FANS

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorFatalThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

316 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Power Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT

Severity and Description: Critical; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorFatalThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT

Severity and Description: Informational; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT

Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorCritThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT

Severity and Description: Informational; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageFatalThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Critical; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageFatalThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 317


Power Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Critical; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageCritThresholdDeasserted /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageNonCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Minor; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above an /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
upper non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageOk /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY

Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value is in the /SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
normal operating range.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM

Related Information

■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301


■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

318 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Fan Events

Fan Events

The following table lists fan events.

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold exceeded

Severity and Description: Major; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedCritThresholdDeasserted /SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold no longer exceeded

Severity and Description: Informational; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedFatalThresholdExceeded /SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded

Severity and Description: Critical; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedFatalThresholdDeasserted /SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded

Severity and Description: Informational; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 319


Memory Events

■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305


■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Memory Events

The following table lists memory events.

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded /SYS/VPS_CPUS

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded /SYS/VPS_MEMORY

Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.

The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk /SYS/VPS_CPUS

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded /SYS/VPS_MEMORY

Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.link_slow "The Quickpath


Interconnect (QPI) link is operating below normal speed."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.link_slow "The Quickpath


Interconnect (QPI) link is operating below normal speed."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.unknown-errcode "An unknown


error code from the Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) reference code has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

320 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Memory Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.unknown-errcode "An unknown
error code from the Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) reference code has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.none "An invalid memory DIMM
configuration has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.none "An invalid memory DIMM
configuration has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.memtest-failed "All memory


channels have been disabled due to memory test failures."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.memtest-failed "All memory


channels have been disabled due to memory test failures."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.quadrank-3rd-slot "A quad-rank


memory DIMM has been installed in the third slot of a memory channel."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.quadrank-3rd-slot "A quad-rank


memory DIMM has been installed in the third slot of a memory channel."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.ddr3u-unsupported "An


unsupported DDR3 ultra low voltage memory DIMM has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.ddr3u-unsupported "An


unsupported DDR3 ultra low voltage memory DIMM has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 321


Memory Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.mrc.unknown-errcode "An unknown


error code from the Memory Reference Code (MRC) has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.mrc.unknown-errcode "An unknown


error code from the Memory Reference Code (MRC) has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.udimm-unsupported "An


unbuffered memory DIMM (UDIMM) has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.udimm-unsupported "An


unbuffered memory DIMM (UDIMM) has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.sodimm-unsupported "An


unsupported SODIMM has been detected in system."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.sodimm-unsupported "An


unsupported SODIMM has been detected in system."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.4gb-fused "An unsupported 4-gb


memory DIMM has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.4gb-fused "An unsupported 4-gb


memory DIMM has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.8gb-fused "An unsupported 8-gb


memory DIMM has been detected."

322 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Memory Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.8gb-fused "An unsupported 8-gb


memory DIMM has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible "A memory DIMM


is incompatible with the memory controller."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible "A memory DIMM


is incompatible with the memory controller."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-maxranks "The


number of ranks allowed on a memory channel has been exceeded."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-maxranks "The


number of ranks allowed on a memory channel has been exceeded."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-quadrank "An


invalid quad-rank memory DIMM configuration has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-quadrank "An


invalid quad-rank memory DIMM configuration has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.numranks-unsupported "A


memory DIMM with an unsupported number of ranks has been detected."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 323


Memory Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.numranks-unsupported "A
memory DIMM with an unsupported number of ranks has been detected."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.speed-slow "A memory DIMM


has been detected that is unable to run at speeds required by the platform."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.speed-slow "A memory DIMM


has been detected that is unable to run at speeds required by the platform."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.disable-quadrank "Memory


channel is populated with too many quad-rank memory DIMMs."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.disable-quadrank "Memory


channel is populated with too many quad-rank memory DIMMs."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.population-invalid "Memory


DIMM is improperly populated or is a type that is not compatible with other DIMMs installed."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.population-invalid "Memory


DIMM is improperly populated or is a type that is not compatible with other DIMMs installed."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.out-of-order "The memory


DIMMs in a channel are not populated in sequential order."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.out-of-order "The memory


DIMMs in a channel are not populated in sequential order."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.

324 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Entity Presence Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.category-unknown "Memory


DIMM is of an unknown type or category."

Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]

Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.category-unknown "Memory


DIMM is of an unknown type or category."

Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.

Related Information
■ “System Chassis Components” on page 301
■ “Cooling Unit Components” on page 303
■ “Disk Backplane Components” on page 304
■ “Memory Device Components” on page 305
■ “Power Unit Components” on page 306
■ “Processor Components” on page 307
■ “System Board Components” on page 308
■ “Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 310

Entity Presence Events

The following table lists entity presence events.

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorError /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_PRESENT ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has


detected an error. Device absent.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorOk /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_PRESENT


DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has


returned to its normal state. Device present.

Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages 325


Physical Security Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorError /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_DISABLED ASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has


detected an error. Device disabled.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorOk /SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT

Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_DISABLED


DEASSERT

Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has


returned to its normal state. Device enabled.

Physical Security Events

Messages and Descriptions Component Name


SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSecurityIntrusion /SYS/INTSW

Oracle ILOM Event Message: Assert

Severity and Description: Major; General Chassis intrusion


asserted.

326 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Index

A Exit screen, 297


activity indicator, 33 exiting from, 272
add-in cards function keys, 247
configuration utilities in Legacy BIOS Boot IO screen, 292
Mode, 252 Legacy Boot Mode, 250
configuration utilities in UEFI BIOS Boot Main screen, 275
Mode, 252 menus, accessing, 247
Advanced BIOS screen, 279 navigating menu options, 249
antistatic service processor network settings, 262
mat, 56 setup screens summary, 246
measures shortcut key sequences, 247
applying, 68 TPM support, 259
wrist strap, 56 UEFI Boot Mode, 250
antistatic measures UEFI-compliant, description, 250
removing, 234 board components, 301
attaching devices to server, 44 boot device, selecting, 257
boot drive
LEDs, 35
B boot mode
battery preserving settings when switching modes, 251
description, 24 selecting, 256
installing, 132 buttons
removing, 131 Fault Remind, 137
BIOS Power, 62, 63, 237
configuring serial port sharing, 47
Ethernet ports booting priority, 49
BIOS boot mode, switching between Legacy BIOS and C
UEFI modes, 251 cable part number
BIOS factory defaults, verifying, 254 auxiliary signal cable, 155, 161, 166
BIOS Setup Utility DVD power and SATA data cable, 195
accessing, 247 left LED indicator module cable, 201
Advanced screen, 279 NVMe cables, 182
boot mode, 250 power cable, 155, 161
Boot screen, 295 power cable, center, 166

327
Index

power cable, right, 166 disk drives See drive


rear storage drive power cable, 170 drive
right LED/USB indicator module cable, 209 hot-plugging, 76
SAS cables, 176 identification, 77
cables latch release button, 80
connecting, 237 DVD drive
disconnecting, 65 description, 25
cabling the server, 45 installing, 193
chassis components, 301 removing, 191
chassis serial number, locating, 53
components and nomenclature, 301
connecting devices to server, 44
connector locations, 44 E
controls, front panel, 16 eight-drive storage drive backplane
cooling unit components, 303 installing, 154
crossover pinouts for SER MGT port, 242 removing, 151
electrostatic discharge
prevention, 68
safety precautions, 56
D entity presence events, 325
default boot mode, 256 environmental events, 312
diagnosing Ethernet cables, connecting, 45
hardware faults, 31 Ethernet ports
DIMMs booting priority, 49, 49
description, 24 device and driver naming, 49
fault LEDs pinout, 240
inconsistencies with BIOS, 113 Exit BIOS screen, 297
Fault Remind button, 113 exploded view of server, 22
identifying a faulty DIMM, 114 external cables, connecting, 45
installing, 118
labels, 112
physical layout, 106
population example for optimal performance, 108 F
population rules, 108 fan assembly door
rank classification labels, 112 installing, 232
removing, 114 removing, 70
supported configurations, 108 fan events, 319
disk backplane components, 304 fan module
disk cage cover installing, 97
installing, 233 removing, 94
removing, 72 fan modules
disk components, 310 description, 24
disk drive backplanes Fault Remind button
description, 25 identifying failed processors, 137

328 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Index

location, 113, 137 PCIe cards, 125


using, 113 power supply, 102
firmware components, 301 processors, 144
front panel rear storage drive, 92
controls, 16 rear-mounted storage drive backplane, 169
function keys within BIOS Setup Utility, 247 server into rack, 234
server top cover, 230
SSD drive, 82
twelve-drive storage drive backplane, 160
G twenty-four drive storage drive backplane, 165
Gigabit Ethernet ports, 239 USB flash drive, 129
pinout, 240 Internal USB flash drive
installing, 129
removing, 128
H Internal USB flash drives
hard disk drive components, 310 description, 24
hard disk drive events, 314 IO allocation
hard drives See drive enabling and disabling resources, 269
hardware faults IO BIOS screen, 292
diagnosing, 31 IP address, setting, 262
HDD drive IPMI type, 300
installing, 82
removing, 77
hot-plugging drives, 76
L
latch release button, drive, 80
LED indicator module (left)
I installing, 200
illustrated parts breakdown, 22 removing, 196
installing LED/USB indicator module (right)
battery, 132 installing, 208
DIMMs, 118 removing, 204
disk cage cover, 233 LED/USB indicator modules
DVD drive, 193 description, 25
eight-drive storage drive backplane, 154 replacing, 196
fan assembly door, 232 LEDs
fan module, 97 boot drive, 35
HDD drive, 82 power supply, 35, 99, 101
LED indicator module (left), 200 storage drive, 35
LED/USB indicator module (right), 208 system status, 33
motherboard assembly, 222 Legacy BIOS Boot Mode
NVMe cables, 181 selecting, 250
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA switching between Legacy BIOS and UEFI boot
card, 187 modes, 251

329
Index

locating chassis serial number, 53 replacing, 183


Locator LED button, 33

P
M PCIe cards
Main BIOS screen, 275 description, 24
memory device components, 305 installing, 125
memory events, 320 removing, 122
menus, BIOS Setup Utility, 247 replacing, 120
motherboard assembly slot characteristics, 121
description, 25 PCIe slot numbering, 121
installing, 222 physical security events, 326
LED/USB cables, 214 pinout
removing, 212 Ethernet ports, 240
replacing, 212 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 240
network management port, 241
RJ-45 to DB-25 crossover pinout, 242
serial management port, 242
N USB port, 244
NET MGT port video connector, 243
pinout, 36, 240, 241 ports
network settings, service processor, 262 Ethernet, 239
Network Time Protocol (NTP), 132 Gigabit Ethernet, 239
NVMe cables network management (NET MGT), 36, 240
description, 25 serial management (SER MGT), 241
installing, 181 USB, 244
replacing, 177 video, 243
power
button, 62, 63, 237
server on, 237
O standby power mode, 65
operating system power down server
supported by UEFI BIOS, 250 emergency, 63
Option ROMs gracefully, 60
enabling and disabling, 265 with Power button, 62
Legacy BIOS allocation, 253 power events, 314
minimizing resource exhaustion, 253 power off the system, 59
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) power supply
key identity properties (KIP) for FRUID auto- description, 24
update feature, 57 installing, 102
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card LEDs, 35, 99, 101
installing, 187 removing, 100
removing, 184 servicing, 99

330 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021


Index

power unit components, 306 rear storage drive, 90


power-on self-test (POST) code checkpoint tests, 34 rear-mounted storage drive backplane, 167
Power/OK indicator, 33 server top cover, 69
processor components, 307 SSD drive, 77
processor socket cover twelve-drive storage drive backplane, 156
installing, 212 twenty-four drive storage drive backplane, 162
removing, 212 USB flash drive, 128
processors replacing
description, 25 battery, 131
identifying faulty processor, 137 DIMMs, 105
installing, 144 fan module, 93
maximum DIMMs supported, 108 LED/USB indicator modules, 196
physical layout, 106 motherboard assembly, 212
removing, 137 NVMe cables, 177
replacing, 136 power supply, 99
PSU See power supply processors, 136
SAS cables, 171
server top cover, 230
storage drive backplanes, 150
R
rear storage drive
installing, 92
removing, 90 S
rear-mounted storage drive backplane safety
installing, 169 ESD precautions, 56
removing, 167 precautions, 55
removing symbols, 56
antistatic measures, 234 SAS cables
battery, 131 description, 25
DIMMs, 114 installing, 174
disk cage cover, 72 replacing, 171
DVD drive, 191 screens, BIOS Setup Utility, 246, 247
eight-drive storage drive backplane, 151 serial management (SER MGT) port
fan assembly door, 70 pinout, 242
fan module, 94 RJ-45 to DB-9 crossover pinout, 242
HDD drive, 77 serial number, locating, 53
LED indicator module (left), 196 serial port sharing, configuring, 47
LED/USB indicator module (right), 204 server
motherboard assembly, 212 diagnosing, 31
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA installing into rack, 234
card, 184 removing from rack, 67
PCIe cards , 122 returning server to operation, 229
power supply, 100 troubleshooting, 27
processors, 137 server top cover

331
Index

installing, 230 T
removing, 69 technical support, 52
server troubleshooting, information needed when tools required for service, 58
contacting support, 52 troubleshooting
server, power on, 248 information needed when contacting support, 52
service overview, 42
preparing server, 59 server, 27
returning server to operation, 229 Trusted Platform Module (TPM), configuring support
service processor for, 259
network settings, configuring, 262 twelve-drive storage drive backplane
Service Required LED, 33 installing, 160
set command, 149 removing, 156
shortcut key sequences in BIOS Setup Utility, 247 twenty-four drive storage drive backplane
show command, 149 installing, 165
shutting down the system removing, 162
gracefully, using Oracle ILOM CLI, 60
gracefully, using Oracle ILOM web interface, 61
gracefully, using the Power button, 62
immediately, using Oracle ILOM CLI, 63
U
UEFI Boot Mode
immediately, using Oracle ILOM web interface, 64
advantages of using, 252
immediately, using the Power button, 63
selecting, 250
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Traps
supported operating systems, 250
generated by system, 311
switching between Legacy BIOS and UEFI boot
SSD drive
modes, 251
installing, 82
UEFI-compliant BIOS, description, 250
removing, 77
USB flash drive
standby power, 63, 65
installing, 129
start command, 238
removing, 128
status indicators
USB port
power supply, 35
pinout, 244
stop command, 60
storage drive
description, 24
hot-plugging, 76 V
LEDs, 35 video port
storage drive backplanes pinout, 243
replacing, 150
support for product, 52
system board components, 308
system chassis components, 301 W
system components and nomenclature, 300 weight of server, 67
system firmware components, 309

332 Oracle Server X6-2L Service Manual • January 2021

You might also like